home
***
CD-ROM
|
disk
|
FTP
|
other
***
search
/
IBM Presents OS/2 Software Hits 1995
/
OS-2_SW_HITS_2ND_EDITION_1995.ISO
/
i17
/
pmx20c3.exe
/
PMXC3.ZIP
/
HELP
/
pmx.HLP
(
.txt
)
< prev
next >
Wrap
OS/2 Help File
|
1995-01-04
|
173KB
|
5,802 lines
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Trademarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) at their first occurrences in
this publication, are trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States or
other countries:
AIX OS/2 PS/2
AnyNet Personal System/2 RISC System/6000
IBM Presentation Manager System/370
Operating System/2
The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) at their first
occurrences in this publication, are trademarks of other companies:
Trademark Owned By
Adobe Adobe Inc.
Motif Open Software Foundation
Postscript Adobe Inc.
Speedo Bitstream Inc.
UNIX UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
X Window System Massachusetts Institute of Technology
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Introducing the X Window System Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The X Window System is a distributed, window-based graphics system developed at
the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. TCP/IP for OS/2 supports Version 11
Release 5 (X11R5) of the X Window System server function.
The OS/2 X Window System server (PMX) enables you to display and control X
Window System client application programs in OS/2 windowed sessions. These
client application programs can reside in one or more IBM or other computing
systems that support the X Window System client function. They are connected
to the PMX host through a TCP/IP network. IBM systems that currently have X
Window System client capability include OS/2, VM, MVS, and AIX* (RISC/6000*,
Personal Systems/2* (PS/2*), and System/370*).
PMX uses OS/2 Presentation Manager (PM) as the X Window System manager and
supports all of the keyboard, display, and pointer devices that are supported
by OS/2 Presentation Manager. Using Presentation Manager as the X Window System
manager enables OS/2 Presentation Manager windowed applications and X Window
System client applications to share the same screen. As a result, another
window manager (such as Motif**) cannot act as the window manager for PMX.
It is possible to install and use OS/2 without a mouse or equivalent pointer
device. However, PMX requires such a device to be installed and usable by
Presentation Manager as a pointer device.
PMX uses large amounts of memory. It is recommended that your workstation have
at least 8MB of memory. The amount depends on which X Window System client
applications are running, and how much memory the individual programs require.
To use PMX, you must have installed on your workstation either the TCP/IP
protocol stack from the TCP/IP for OS/2 Base Kit or an equivalent protocol
stack. This chapter describes how to install PMX on the TCP/IP stack from the
TCP/IP for OS/2 Base Kit.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.1. System Requirements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Prerequisite Programs
In order to install and use this kit, you must also have the following programs
already installed:
o IBM TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2: Base Kit, or an equivalent protocol stack
o IBM OS/2 Version 2.0, or higher
Note: PMX requires the 32-bit graphic engine of OS/2 2.0 or higher. This was
first made available in the service pack for OS/2 2.0. Thus PMX requires that
you install the service pack if you use OS/2 2.0.
Memory Requirements
The following table shows the approximate memory requirements for this kit.
Note that the actual memory requirements depend heavily on the mix of X
applications that are used with the X window system server.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéTCP/IP Function ΓöéRecommended Γöé
Γöé ΓöéMemory Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéX Window System Server Γöé8 Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
Disk Space
The disk space required for this kit are:
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéTCP/IP Kit ΓöéDisk Space Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéX Window Server Kit Γöé11.7 Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
Swapper Space
We also recommend that you have enough free disk space for the OS/2 swapper.
The SWAPPATH statement in your CONFIG.SYS file specifies on which disk that
free space must be. The actual swap space is affected greatly by the amount of
memory that is available, and by the actual X applications and OS/2
applications that are to be run simultaneously.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéFree Space for Swapper Γöé10 MB Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2. Implementation Notes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The READ.ME file on the installation diskettes provides information about PMX
implementation, enhancements, and restrictions. The following list provides
additional information about PMX implementation:
o PMX is ported from the MIT X Consortium X11R5 distribution.
o Because Presentation Manager is the window manager, you cannot use other
window managers.
o For workstations that have a mouse with only two buttons, press both mouse
button 1 and mouse button 2 simultaneously when directions say to use the
middle button.
o Save unders are currently supported only for top-level windows.
o The X Window System shape extension is currently supported in PMX. The shape
extension support is limited for top level windows because Presentation
Manager only supports rectangular windows. The shape extension is fully
supported for child windows.
o PMX does not support drawing on the X "root" window. X drawing on the root
window will appear to work to X Window System client applications, but no
drawing will actually be done (for example, to the Presentation Manager
desktop). If a graphic operation that reads data from the root window is
attempted, it will succeed. The data that is read will be from the PM
desktop.
o The handling of key strokes in client windows has been changed. Most OS/2
key combinations are not passed to OS/2, but go only to the X application.
The combinations that still cause OS/2 actions are: alt-pf4 (close), alt-pf5
(restore), alt-pf7 (move), alt-pf8 (resize), alt-pf9 (minimize), and alt-pf10
(maximize). A few other OS/2 key combinations cannot be suppressed by
Presentation Manager programs such as PMX: ctrl-alt-del, ctrl-esc, and
alt-esc.
o PMX does not supply a X font server. However, following the application of
CSD UN52841 PMX can connect to X11R5 font servers on other platforms (such as
AIX).
o PMX does NOT support the obsolete .snf font technology. Font technology has
been updated in X11R5 to .pcf format. Older .snf font source (.bdf format)
can be recompiled into .pcf via the bdftopcf and mkfontdr utilities.
Alternately, the .snf fonts can be loaded into a X11R5 font server on a
remote platform, and used by PMX.
Note: After the installation of PMX CSD UN68122, .bdf and .pcf fonts can be
converted into better performing native PM fonts by using the BDFTOPM or
PCFTOPM utilities.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Installing PMX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can install the IBM TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2: X Window System Server Kit
from either the product diskette or a code server. After you complete the
installation, you will configure PMX. For configuration information, refer to
Configuring PMX.
PMX includes the following components:
o PMX program (PMX.EXE)
o X Window System font support
o National language support for keyboards
o X Window System utilities
Note: Once you have installed the TCP/IP 2.0 for OS/2: X Window Server Kit,
any form of reinstallation of this kit can overlay and destroy files that you
might have changed. Whether you reinstall the kit, install a Corrective
Service Diskette, or install a refresh or subsequent release, you risk losing
data. You should first save any such files before you start installation. In
the case of PMX, the files include:
\tcpip\bin\xinit.cmd
\tcpip\x11\misc\fonts.ali
\tcpip\x11\75dpi\fonts.ali
In addition, you may have added fonts to either of the \tcpip\x11\misc or
\tcpip\x11\75dpi directories. In this case, after installing a Corrective
Service Diskette or reinstalling the product, you should run the mkfontdr
utility in each of these directories to create a correct FONTS.DIR file that
includes the fonts that you added.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. Installing the Software from a Product Diskette ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To install the TCP/IP for OS/2 PMX product using the Installation Program,
follow these steps:
1. Insert the X Window System Server installation diskette.
2. At an OS/2 command prompt, type A:TCPINST and press Enter.
3. Select the X Window System Server kit.
You can also select installation of the BookManager softcopy publications
and the IBM Library Reader at this time.
4. Select the Install pushbutton.
5. Insert diskettes as prompted.
6. Exit the program.
7. Restart your system to make the installation effective.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. Installing the Software from a Code Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This kit complies with IBM's Configuration, Installation, and Distribution
(CID) architecture, which provides for unattended, remote installation of
programs and applications from code servers to client workstations.
A code server is a workstation that contains the source files (or diskette
images) to be used during installation.
A client workstation is the workstation on which this kit is being installed,
configured or maintained. It uses the resources of a code server to gain
access to the files it requires.
For information about how to install this kit from a code server to a client
workstation, see the IBM TCP/IP Version 2.0 for OS/2: Installation and
Administration.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Configuring PMX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX can be configured by using the TCP/IP Configuration Notebook program,
TCPIPCFG, or by selecting:
1. Commands menu-bar choice
2. Configure cascading choice
3. Initial from the cascaded menu
You can configure the following options for PMX:
o Keyboard type
o Type of focus
o Type of window raising
o Hosts authorized to use PMX
o Dimensions of the cursor
o Type of cursor
o Color visuals and color database file
o Font type and path
o X data transfer mechanism
o Miscellaneous other options
Configuring PMX using the Configuration menu or the configuration notebook is
more convenient than configuring it manually, which involves editing
configuration files and entering parameters.
Note: Many of the configuration options can also be set at the X Window
System Server and XINIT command lines. If you set parameters in both places,
the command line parameters will override the options set in the configuration
notebook or PMX Configuration option.
Related Topics:
Environment variables used by PMX
Files used by PMX
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. Using the Configuration Notebook Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To access configuration information for PMX with the configuration notebook,
double-click with mouse button 1 on the TCP/IP Configuration icon in the TCP/IP
folder. There are three pushbuttons at the bottom of each configuration page.
Undo Discards any changed values since the page was last updated.
Default Displays the default values (not on X Hosts page).
Help Provides help information for the page.
To set an option on a page of the notebook, select the desired option. When
you leave the page, the values on that page are updated.
To save your changes, close the configuration notebook. You must restart the X
Window System Server for the changes to take effect.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. Keyboard Options Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this page to specify what keyboard you are using. For information on
setting your keyboard manually, see National Language Support for Keyboards.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.1. National Language Support for Keyboards ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX provides support for non-USA keyboards. You can define your keyboard
according to your country's specifications. PMX uses the XMODMAP utility to
set up your keyboard for the language use of the countries specified in
Keyboard Languages Supported by PMX.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéLanguage ΓöéKeyboard ΓöéLanguage ΓöéKeyboard Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBelgian Γöénl_BE ΓöéJapanese English Γöéen_JP Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBelgian French Γöéfr_BE ΓöéLatin American Γöées_LA Γöé
Γöé Γöé ΓöéSpanish Γöé Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéCanadian French Γöéfr_CA ΓöéNorwegian Γöéno_NO Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDanish Γöéda_DK ΓöéPortuguese Γöépt_PT Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDutch Γöénl_NL ΓöéSpanish Γöées_ES Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFinnish Γöéfi_FI ΓöéSwedish Γöésv_SV Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFrench Γöéfr_FR ΓöéSwiss French Γöéfr_CH Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéGerman Γöéde_DE ΓöéSwiss German Γöéde_CH Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéGreek Γöéel_GR ΓöéTurkish Γöétr_TR Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéIcelandic Γöéis_IS ΓöéUnited Kingdom Γöéen_GB Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéItalian Γöéit_IT ΓöéUnited States Γöéen_US Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéJapanese Γöéja_JP Γöé Γöé Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
You must define the LANG environment variable and the appropriate language
keyboard value in your CONFIG.SYS file, as follows:
1. Reboot the workstation or type set LANG=( keyboard_language_value ) at the
command line. This changes the mapping to your specifications in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
2. Run XINIT to start PMX and set the correct keyboard.
The keyboard handling is identical to the X Window System for AIX RISC
System/6000 keyboards. The XMODMAP files in AIX, which modify how the keyboard
is used by X Window System, can also be used with PMX without change.
You might need to change your keyboard definitions in a way different from what
running XINIT does. Do the following steps:
1. Start PMX using the PMX command with the -k n parameter.
2. Run XMODMAP with your keyboard definition file as input. For example, if
TCP/IP for OS/2 is installed in your C drive, your PMX Italian keyboard
file is the file:
c:\tcpip\X11\xdefaults\xmodmap\it_IT\keyboard
For comparison, in RISC System/6000 AIX 3.2, the definition for using
Italian for the file follows:
/usr/lpp/X11/xdefaults/xmodmap/it_IT/keyboard
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.2. 101 key help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the 101 key option sets the keyboard type to a 101-key keyboard. Most
USA keyboards have 101 keys. This type is the default keyboard type for PMX.
The setting can take effect dynamically while the server is running.
Related Topics:
National Language Support for the Keyboard
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.3. 102 key help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the 102 key option sets the keyboard type to a 102-key keyboard. Most
European keyboards have 102 keys. The setting can take effect dynamically
while the server is running.
Related Topics:
National Language Support for the Keyboard
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.4. 106 key help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the Japanese 5576-002 (106 key) option sets the keyboard type to a
106-key (Japanese) keyboard. This setting can take effect dynamically while the
server is running.
Related Topics:
National Language Support for the Keyboard
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.5. 106A key help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the Japanese 5576-A01 (106 key) option sets the keyboard type to a
106-key (Japanese) keyboard. This setting can take effect dynamically while the
server is running.
Related Topics:
National Language Support for the Keyboard
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.6. 124 key help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the Japanese 5576-001 (124 key) option sets the keyboard type to a
124-key (Japanese) keyboard. This setting can take effect dynamically while the
server is running.
Related Topics:
National Language Support for the Keyboard
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.7. Language help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this setting to select the language support for PMX. This setting will be
used by XINIT.CMD at startup to configure the language for your keyboard. The
default is United States.
Related Topics:
National Language Support for the Keyboard
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. Focus/Raise Window Control Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this page to specify what user actions should give X Window System client
applications focus or raise these applications to the top. For information on
defining these user actions manually, see the following parameters in Using the
OS/2 X Window System Server:
o -explicitfocus
o -implicitfocus
o -clickclienttoraise
o -clickframetoraise
Related Topics:
Controlling Focus
Raising Windows
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1. Controlling Focus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Both PM and X and their applications are concerned with keyboard and mouse
focus. Focus indicates:
o Which windows get keyboard key presses and releases
o Which windows get mouse button presses and releases
o Which windows get mouse movement events
In both X and PM, window manager functions have focus policies. In X, this is
usually controlled by the implicit and explicit focus control options:
o If explicit focus control is in effect, you would click on the X client
window (where mouse and keyboard actions should go). Thereafter, under normal
circumstances, those actions will go to that window even if the pointer is
moved outside the window.
o In contrast, with implicit focus control, you do not need to click to move
focus. Focus normally goes to the X client window containing the pointer.
Both PM and X applications can modify focus temporarily. Most often this is
done when handling menus or scroll bars and is called grabbing or capturing
focus. The application keeps focus until the operation is ended in some way.
In PM the overall behavior is always explicit focus control, although an
application can control focus within its own windows quite freely. PMX must
reconcile the focus behaviors of the PM window manager functions and the X
applications. It can do this because, as a single PM application, it can
provide either explicit or implicit behavior within its own windows.
By default, PMX provides explicit control. You can also specify the
-explicitfocus option on the command line.
The -implicitfocus option may be specified on the command line to start PMX
with implicit control. In implicit mode, focus follows the pointer only if PMX
has already gotten focus explicitly, since PM only allows focus to be changed
explicitly by clicks or similar keyboard actions. Once PMX has focus, it can
change focus implicitly within all of its X client windows.
The configuration submenu "Focus/Raise Controls" of the server window can be
used to select implicit or explicit focus, allowing you to change the focus
behavior at any time.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2. Raising Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX provides two methods for bringing windows to the top:
1. Usually, in Presentation Manager, clicking on either the client area or the
frame causes the window to come to the top. The -clickclienttoraise PMX
command option starts PMX in this mode. It tells the server to raise
windows to the top when clicks are done in the application (client) area.
This is the default PMX behavior.
2. The -clickframetoraise option of the PMX command tells the server to raise
windows to the top only when clicks are done in the PM frame. Clicking in
the application (client) area will not raise the window. This is a common
option for many X window managers, and is provided in PMX for users who
prefer this behavior.
The configuration submenu "Focus/Raise Controls" of the server window can be
used to specify whether or not you can click on only the frame to bring a PMX
client window to the top. Thus, you can change this behavior at any time.
You can focus both types of windows by clicking on the frame or title bar; this
brings the window to the top. However, the X Window System client application
windows treat input focus differently from the way PM windows do. The
differences occur when you click in the X Window System client application area
or move the cursor in and out of the X Window System client application areas,
as follows:
o When you click in the client area and the X Window System client application
window does not have focus:
- The window is given focus but is not brought to the top.
- The click is not passed to the client.
o When the X Window System client application window is focused and you move
the cursor to another client window, the focus follows.
o To read keystrokes, leave the cursor in the window where you want your
keystrokes directed.
o Some applications will do a "grab" of the keyboard focus; although you might
have the X Window System cursor in one window, keyboard strokes might still
be going to a different window. In this case, the highlighting of the PM
frame shows where the cursor is and not where the keystrokes are going.
Although seamless integration of PM and X Window System was and is the goal of
PMX designers, the current design of window focusing reflects the best
compromise to accommodate the inherent differences in PM and X Window System
windowing technologies.
If you are using the -pseudocolor option to enable applications to modify
screen colors, bringing an X Window System window that has a unique colormap to
the top can radically affect the colors of all other windows on the PM Desktop.
In order to restore the default PM Desktop colors, click on the PM Desktop
background or select Restore Original Colors from the PMX Commands menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.3. Click to focus help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the Click in window for focus option tells the server to transfer
focus from one client window to another only by clicking in the window. This
is the normal behavior for Presentation Manager windows and is the default
behavior for the server.
Related Topics:
Controlling Focus
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.4. Pointer for focus help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the Move pointer into client area for focus option tells the server
to transfer focus from one client window to another simply by moving the
pointer into the client area of the window. It is not necessary to click on a
client window to transfer focus to it (provided some PMX client window already
has focus). This is not the normal behavior for Presentation Manager windows.
Related Topics:
Controlling Focus
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.5. Click frame to raise help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the Click frame to raise option tells the server to raise windows to
the top only when you click on the PM frame. When you click on the application
(for example, the client area), the window is not raised.
Related Topics:
Raising Windows
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.6. Click client/frame to raise help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the Click frame or client area to raise option tells the server to
raise windows to the top when you click on the application (for example, the
client area). This is the usual Presentation Manager behavior.
Note: Clicks in the PM frame can also raise the window.
This option is the default for the server.
Related Topics:
Raising Windows
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. X Host Authorization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this page to specify which hosts are authorized to use PMX. For
information on defining these hosts manually, see X0HOSTS File.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.1. X Host listbox help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the X Host Authorization (x0hosts) list box displays the entries in
the x0hosts file, identifying the network X client hosts authorized to connect
to your X server. You can add, edit, or delete file entries.
Related Topics:
XHOST Utility-Authorizing Client Hosts
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.2. Host timeout help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Host timeout entryfield to specify the number of seconds to wait when
initializing entries in the X0HOSTS file. If PMX cannot initialize the entry
within the specified time period, an attempt will be made to resolve the host
name from the HOSTS file. This is useful when the nameserver does not respond
to requests from PMX.
Related Topics:
XHOST Utility-Authorizing Client Hosts
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.3. Add pushbutton help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the Add pushbutton displays a dialog box from which you can add one
entry to the x0hosts file.
Related Topics:
XHOST Utility-Authorizing Client Hosts
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.4. Edit pushbutton help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the Edit pushbutton displays a dialog box from which you can edit a
selected entry in the x0hosts file. This pushbutton is disabled if you select
multiple entries or if you do not specify an entry.
Related Topics:
XHOST Utility-Authorizing Client Hosts
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.5. Delete pushbutton help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting the Delete pushbutton deletes the designated entries in the x0hosts
file. If no entries are selected, this pushbutton is disabled.
Related Topics:
XHOST Utility-Authorizing Client Hosts
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. Cursor Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this page to define the appearance and size of the cursor when it is over X
Window System client applications. For information on defining the cursor
manually, see the following parameters in Using the OS/2 X Window System
Server:
o -lc
o -pmcursor
o -colorcursor
o -bwcursor
o -reversecolorcursor
o -reversebwcursor
o -fc
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5.1. Default cursor dimensions help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Default cursor dimensions option to define the default dimensions for
the cursor. This is the default for the server.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5.2. Double cursor dimensions help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Double cursor dimensions option to double the dimensions of any cursor.
This selection is disabled if the Presentation manager cursor is selected.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5.3. Presentation Manager cursor help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Presentation Manager cursor option to display the Presentation Manager
cursor instead of the X Window System cursor. The Presentation Manager cursor
is limited to default dimensions.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5.4. X color cursor help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the X color cursor option to display X cursors as colored cursors. This is
the default unless the PM device driver does not support colored cursors.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5.5. X reverse color cursor help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the X reverse color cursor option to display X cursors as colored cursors.
The foreground and background colors are opposite from what they would be with
the X color cursor option.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5.6. X black and white cursor help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the X black and white cursor option to display X cursors as black and white
cursors. This is the default if the PM device driver does not support colored
cursors.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5.7. X reverse black and white cursor help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the X reverse black and white cursor help option to display X cursors as
black and white cursors. The foreground and background colors are opposite
from what they would be with the X black and white cursor option.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5.8. Cursor font name help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Cursor font name field to specify the default font used for the X
cursor. This option does not apply when Presentation manager cursor is
selected.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6. Color Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this page to define how PMX manages colors in X Window System client
applications. For information on defining colors manually, see the following
parameters in Using the OS/2 X Window System Server:
o -staticcolor
o -palettemgr
o -pseudocolor
o -co
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.1. Color Table Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
It is unusual for Presentation Manager applications to modify physical colors
on the screen. It is much more common for X Window System client applications
to do so. PMX attempts to strike a balance between these two behaviors.
X applications fall into the following three groups:
Group 1 Does not modify color, and chooses from what is available.
Group 2 Can select exact colors, but uses whatever approximations are
available if the exact colors cannot be allocated.
Group 3 Attempts to allocate colors or create colormaps often without
checking whether this is possible. The result often is a variety of
error messages from the application. If you have this situation and
if your workstation has a display adapter for which PM has Palette
Manager support, you can run the application after starting PMX with
the -palettemgr or -pseudocolor command line options.
If you use the -pseudocolor or -palettemgr options, see Installing and
Controlling Colormaps for more information.
For more information about color tables, see Types of Color Tables.
For more information about color command line options, see Specifying PMX
Command Color Options.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.1.1. Types of Color Tables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
There are five terms that you might see in discussing PMX color support:
o Color Visuals
o Colormaps in the X Window system
o Color Tables in Presentation Manager (cannot be modified)
o Realizable Color Tables in Presentation Manager (modifiable)
o Palettes in Presentation Manager (can be modified)
In both the X Window System and in Presentation Manager, applications specify
colors by using red-green-blue (RGB) values. Graphical operations on windows
and bitmaps, however, are performed in terms of pixel values. A colormap is an
X Window System table that maps pixel values to RGB color entries. Presentation
Manager has corresponding pixel-to-RGB mapping tables called color tables and
palettes. A realizable color table allows dynamic changes to be made to its RGB
entries.
In X Window System terminology, color visuals are the types and depths of
colormaps supported by a specific server and display adapter combination. For
example, for a particular display adapter, an X Window System server might have
a 5-bit deep visual with only 32 gray scale colors and both a 4-bit deep color
visual with 16 colors and an 8-bit deep color visual with 256 colors.
PMX supports the following color visual types:
o StaticColor
o PseudoColor
In each case, the visuals are only screen deep. That is, if a display supports
256 colors, the colormaps that PMX supports contain 256 colors. When drawing
graphics, these colors can be selected with 8-bit pixel values.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.1.1.1. The StaticColor Colormap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The colors in a StaticColor colormap cannot be changed. In PMX there is only
one such colormap available, and it contains the colors that are in the default
physical color table of the display adapter. If the display adapter is VGA, the
StaticColor colormap has 16 colors and PMX uses 4-bit pixel values. If the
display adapter is 8514, XGA, SVGA, or Image Adapter, and if there is
sufficient adapter video memory installed, then the PMX StaticColor colormap
has 256 colors and PMX uses 8-bit pixels.
When display adapters, like XGA-2 in 65536 colors mode, provide than 256
colors, PMX provides a 256 color StaticColor colormap.
PMX can support a StaticColor colormap on any display adapter. If the X Window
System client asks for an RGB value that is not in the colormap, the colormap
is not changed. Instead, the client is given a pixel value which maps to an
existing physical color that is closest to the requested color.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.1.1.2. PseudoColor Colormaps ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Presentation Manager supports two types of modifiable color tables:
o Palette Manager palettes
o Realizable Color Tables (RLCT)
These types of color tables are supported for 8514, XGA, and SVGA display
adapters, provided enough video memory is installed on the adapter. PMX can use
either type of Presentation Manager color table in order to make PseudoColor
colormaps available to X Window System client applications.
For PMX to successfully use Palette Manager palettes, however, PMX needs to
have a Graphics Engine hook (GREHOOK.DLL) installed in the OS/2 operating
system at boot time. This dynamic link library (DLL) is supplied with PMX. The
TCP/IP for OS/2 installation program modifies OS2.INI to point to the hook DLL.
The HOOKINST utility has been provided if it ever becomes necessary to manually
manipulate the OS2.INI entry for the hook DLL.
When PMX is running in PseudoColor mode, there is a default PseudoColor
colormap from which applications can allocate colors. This default PseudoColor
colormap has some entries reserved for the Presentation Manager desktop colors.
The colors in these reserved entries are shared between Presentation Manager
applications and X Window System clients. If PMX is using Presentation Manager
Palette Manager palettes, then, optionally, there are also entries reserved in
the default PseudoColor colormap for use by other OS/2 applications which
utilize Palette Manager palettes. The colors in these reserved entries are not
available to X Window System clients. The number of default PseudoColor
colormap entries reserved for each use can be queried and configured using the
Color page of the PMX Configuration Notebook.
If an X Window System client application runs out of available entries in the
default PseudoColor colormap, it can create a new empty PseudoColor colormap
and associate the new colormap with its windows. Hence, when PMX is running in
PseudoColor mode, there can be several unique PseudoColor colormaps in use.
Only one PseudoColor colormap can be installed into the physical hardware at
any time.
Warning: OS/2 applications which use Palette Manager palettes do not display
their colors correctly when PMX uses Realizable Color Tables to provide
PseudoColor colormaps. If running PMX in Realizable Color Table mode
(-pseudocolor) causes black holes to occur in non-PMX windows, then try running
PMX in Palette Manager mode (-palettemgr).
Note: If PMX crashes while in PseudoColor mode, and leaves the PM Desktop
colors messed up, run the PMXRESET utility to recover normal PM Desktop colors.
If you do not specify on the PMX command that a specific type of colormap is to
be used, PMX uses the StaticColor colormap by default.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.1.2. Specifying PMX Command Color Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
There are several command line flags for color control:
Parameters Description
-staticcolor One StaticColor colormap is available.
-pseudocolor One default and multiple private PseudoColor
colormaps are available. PMX uses PM Realizable
Color Tables. No StaticColor colormap is made
available.
-palettemgr One default and multiple private PseudoColor
colormaps are available. PMX uses PM Palette
Manager palettes. No StaticColor colormap is made
available.
If you specify neither -staticcolor, -pseudocolor, nor -palettemgr, then PMX
defaults to -staticcolor.
PMX will also default to -staticcolor if you choose -pseudocolor but the
Presentation Manager display device driver does not support Realizable Color
Tables, or if you choose -palettemgr but the device driver does not support
Palette Manager palettes.
When PMX is running in -staticcolor mode, X Window System clients will receive
errors when they attempt operations that are legal only for PseudoColor
colormaps.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.1.3. Installing and Controlling Colormaps ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In the X Window System, the window manager is in charge of installing colormaps
into the hardware. In this case, PMX is the window manager. PMX changes
colormaps only if it is running in a PseudoColor mode.
PMX installs the colormap of an X Window System window whenever it is made the
top window on the screen. If this is not the default PseudoColor colormap, this
can affect the colors of all windows on the screen, so that they do not have
their normal colors. Thus, you can control what colormap is in effect by
controlling which application is brought to the top to be used. Note that by
using Palette Manager (-palettemgr), you will have a better chance of having PM
and X application's colors coexisting correctly.
To bring an application to the top, do either of the following actions:
o Click on its frame or title bar.
o Use the Raise lowest window option of the PMX Command menu.
An application window can also come to the top for other reasons, such as being
restored from an icon.
The Command menu Refresh All Clients option repaints all PM windows, whether
they are X Window System windows or not. PM recalculates colors of all windows
in terms of the current physical color table. This often brings most screen
colors back to approximately what was normal before you began running X Window
System client applications that modified the color tables.
The default PseudoColor colormap is initialized with the contents of the
Presentation Manager default color table. As this happens at PMX startup time,
you will see some transient color changes occur on the screen. A set of PMX
standard desktop colors are reserved within the default PseudoColor colormap in
order to minimize changes of colors within non-PMX windows. PM frame and menu
colors usually are not disturbed, for example. You may notice that icons and
images have strange colors, especially when PMX runs in Realizable Color Table
mode, because Presentation Manager does not choose their colors from the set of
desktop standard colors. You can minimize this effect by using the Color page
of the Configuration notebook to reserve more PM desktop colors in the default
PseudoColor colormap. Whatever colors are reserved for the PM Desktop are also
available for use by X Window System clients, but cannot be modified by those
clients.
If an X Window System client creates a new PseudoColor colormap, its entries
are initialized to the original PM default color table colors, but no entries
are marked as allocated. Most applications fill in such colormaps starting
from the beginning, and can affect all other colors on the screen. In
particular, in PM, physical color zero usually is black, and all black colors
change to whatever the X Window System client allocates first.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.2. PMXRESET utility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMXRESET is a PMX 2.0 utility for recovering correct PM desktop colors in the
event that PMX crashes while it is in PseudoColor mode.
PMXRESET takes no command line information. It does nothing if it is
accidentally run while PMX is also running.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.3. HOOKINST utility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HOOKINST is a PMX 2.0 utility for installing a PMX Graphics Engine Hook DLL
(GREHOOK.DLL). This Graphics Engine Hook DLL must be loaded at OS/2 boot time
before PMX can provide PseudoColor support using PM Palette Manager palettes.
When booting up, OS/2 checks an entry in OS2.INI for the pathname of the
Graphics Engine hook.
HOOKINST manipulates the OS2.INI entry so that it points to the PMX
GREHOOK.DLL. You must reboot OS/2 if you run HOOKINST to change OS2.INI.
Command formats:
hookinst ? -- display help text
hookinst -- displays current PMX GREHOOK DLL path
hookinst delete -- deletes PMX GREHOOK entry in OS2.INI
hookinst d:\tcpip\dll\grehook.dll
-- creates or alters the PMX GREHOOK entry in OS2.INI
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.4. StaticColor help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If the StaticColor option is specified, one StaticColor colormap will be used
for all X Window System clients.
Related Topics:
The StaticColor Colormap
Color Table Support
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.5. PseudoColor Using PM Palette Manager help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If the PseudoColor using PM Palette Manager option is specified, one default
and multiple private PseudoColor colormaps are available. PMX uses PM Palette
Manager palettes to change screen colors. No StaticColor colormap is made
available.
Related Topics:
PseudoColor Colormaps
Color Table Support
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.6. PseudoColor using PM Realizable Color Tables help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If the PseudoColor using PM Realizable Color Tables option is specified, one
default and multiple private PseudoColor colormaps are available. PMX uses PM
Realizable Color Tables to alter screen colors. No StaticColor colormap is made
available.
Warning: OS/2 applications which use Palette Manager palettes do not display
their colors correctly when PMX uses Realizable Color Tables to provide
PseudoColor colormaps. If running PMX in Realizable Color Table mode causes
black holes to occur in non-PMX windows, then try running PMX in Palette
Manager mode.
Related Topics:
PseudoColor Colormaps
Color Table Support
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.7. PMX Private Colormap Entries help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the PMX Private Colormap Entries spin button to specify the number of
entries in the default PseudoColor colormap that are available exclusively for
X Window System clients. These entries are private to PMX, since they are not
shared with other OS/2 windows.
This spin button is disabled when the StaticColor button has been chosen.
When PMX is running in PseudoColor color mode, there are a total of 256 entries
available in the PseudoColor default colormap. These 256 entries can be
allocated to three uses:
o PMX Private Colormap Entries are color cells available only for X
applications. While it is possible for these entries to be shared among X
applications, they are not available to any other PM application.
o PM Desktop Colors are entries that contain a suite of standard Presentation
Manager colors. There are three sizes of suites: 20, 64, or 128 standard
colors. The colors in these entries cannot be changed by either PM or X
applications, but are shared by all.
o Entries for PM Palette Manager Applications are color cells that are
available to other OS/2 applications that use PM palettes, such as bitmap
viewers or image painting applications. While it is possible for these
entries to be shared among PM applications, they are not available to any X
application.
Picking the number of PMX Private Colormap Entries uniquely determines the
number of PM Desktop Colors. When PMX is running in Realizable Color Table
mode, only discrete values of 128, 192, or 236 private colormap entries can be
used. Since PM Realizable Color Table mode is incompatible with PM Palette
Manager applications, there are no entries set aside in the default PseudoColor
colormap for Entries for PM Palette Manager Applications.
When PMX is running in Palette Manager mode, there is a continuous range from
129 to 236 of private colormap entries available, and either 20 or 64 PM
Desktop Colors. Any default PseudoColor colormap entries not used as private or
PM desktop color entries, are available to other PM Palette Manager
applications.
Note: The number of Entries for PM Palette Manager Applications is maximum at
63 when the number of PMX Private Colormap Entries is set to 129.
Related Topics:
PseudoColor Colormaps
Color Table Support
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6.8. Color database help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Color database file option to enter the path and the name of the file
where the color database can be found. This file shows a mapping between a
large number of color names and red-green-blue values. It can be customized by
editing the file and changing the red, green, and blue values associated with a
particular color name.
Related Topics:
Color Database File (RGB.TXT)
Color Table Support
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7. Font Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this page to specify the directory containing the fonts you want it to use
in X Window System client applications. For information on defining fonts
manually, see the following parameters in Using the OS/2 X Window System
Server:
o -fn
o -fp
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.1. Types of fonts used by PMX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
After CSD UN68122 (or subsequent PMX CSDs) have been installed, PMX can use
native PM fonts, which display text significantly faster than .pcf fonts.
There are several types of fonts which PMX can use:
BDF source fonts
PCF bitmap fonts
Speedo** scalable fonts
Private PM bitmap (.xfn) fonts
Public PM bitmap fonts
Public PM scalable fonts
PMX no longer uses the obsolete SNF bitmap fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.1.1. BDF Font File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Bitmap Display Fonts (BDF) format is an ASCII source code format for defining X
Window System fonts. The PMX server cannot use BDF format fonts directly. Fonts
in BDF format must first be compiled to either XFN (using the BDFTOPM utility)
or PCF (using the BDFTOPCF utility) formats.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.1.2. PCF Font File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Portable Compiled Format (PCF) font files are binary encodings of BDF fonts
created by using the BDFTOPCF utility.
As the name of this format states, these binary files are portable between X
Window System Servers on different platforms. PCF fonts compiled with the
BDFTOPCF utility on any operating system can be used with any X Window System
server that is based on X11R5 or later.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.1.3. Speedo Font File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Speedo fonts are scalable fonts supplied by Bitstream Inc. PMX is able to use
these fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.1.4. SNF Font File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
SNF stands for Server Natural Format.
PMX does NOT support the obsolete .snf font technology. Older .snf font source
(.bdf format) can be recompiled into .xfn via the bdftopm and mkfontdr
utilities. Alternately, the .snf fonts can be loaded into a X11R5 font server
on a remote platform, and used by PMX.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.1.5. Public and Private PM Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A clear distinction can be drawn between OS/2 PM Public and Private fonts. OS/2
PM Public fonts:
o Can be used by any process in the OS/2 system.
o Use system resources.
o Are usually loaded at system startup.
o Cannot be deleted until after system shutdown.
o Are available in either Image (bitmap) or Outline (scalable) formats.
Note: Only PM Public Outline fonts can be scaled.
OS/2 PM Private fonts, on the other hand:
o Are loaded by a specific process (ie, the PMX Server).
o Can be used only by that specific process.
o Are available only in Image (bitmap) format.
PMX private fonts are created using the bdftopm or pcftopm utilities, each
generating font files with the .xfn extensions. However, by renaming the
extension from .xfn to .FON, you can install the resulting .FON font file as a
PM Public font using the PM Font Palette Desktop utility.
If there are other OS/2 PM .FON private fonts that you want to make available
to PMX, install them as OS/2 PM Public fonts, and specify pmpublic\ on the PMX
font path.
For additional related information about PM Public fonts, see Build the PM
Public Font List-MKFONTDR -pmpublic and PM Public Fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.1.6. XFN Font File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX can use native PM bitmap fonts, which display text significantly faster
than .pcf fonts. Use the BDFTOPM or PCFTOPM utilities to convert X Window
Bitmap fonts to native PM bitmap fonts.
.XFN font files are actually OS/2 DLLs that contain one PM bitmap font resource
along with additional resources that describe the original .BDF or .PCF X font.
PMX loads each .XFN DLL as a private PM font whenever an X client opens that
font. PMX unloads the .XFN DLL after the X client closes the font.
One important difference between .XFN and .PCF fonts is that PMX is able to
scale .PCF bitmap fonts in order to fulfill some OpenFont requests for
non-existent .PCF fonts. Since .XFN fonts are loaded directly into PM, and PM
does not support scaling of bitmap fonts, .XFN fonts will not be scaled.
If your X application requires scaled bitmap fonts, continue to use the
necessary .PCF fonts, or else substitute scalable PM Public fonts.
Note: The PMX .XFN format does not handle DBCS fonts; please continue to use
.PCF format for those fonts which have more than 256 characters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.1.7. PM Public Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX can use native PM public fonts, which display text significantly faster
than .pcf fonts.
OS/2 PM comes with a good variety of bitmap and scalable fonts. Installing word
processor or graphics editing packages on OS/2 usually adds more PM Public
fonts that can be used by any PM application on your OS/2 system. PMX allows X
applications the use of all these PM Public fonts when pmpublic\ is added to
the PMX font path.
Since the contents of the PM Public font list is subject to change, PMX creates
a fresh list of public fonts each time pmpublic\ is activated. It does this by
running mkfontdr -pmpublic as a child process. mkfontdr -pmpublic creates an
updated fonts.dir file in the subdirectory pointed to by the ETC environment
variable.
Note: pmpublic\ is not automatically added to your PMX font path during PMX
CSD installation.
PM Public fonts do not support the character code page ISO8859-1 that many X
clients request. PMX solves this problem by translating ISO8859-1 strings into
code page 850 strings that PM can handle. Most PM Public fonts occur two times
in the ETC\fonts.dir file, once for code page ISO8859-1 and again for code page
IBM-850.
Note: PMX will also use a fonts.ali file if it is found in the same ETC
subdirectory with the fonts.dir file for the PM Public fonts. PMX does not ship
a fonts.ali file for PM Public fonts.
Here are sample fonts.dir entries made for one PM Public bitmap font:
System VIO.pmx -ibmos2-"System VIO"-medium-r-normal--26-160-120-120-c-120-iso8859-1
System VIO.pmx -ibmos2-"System VIO"-medium-r-normal--28-170-120-120-c-120-ibm-850
And an example of entries made for a scalable PM Public font:
Helvetica Italic.pmx -adobe-Helvetica-medium-i-normal--0-0-0-0-p-0-ibm-850
Helvetica Italic.pmx -adobe-Helvetica-medium-i-normal--0-0-0-0-p-0-iso8859-1
An example of using this scalable font (after PMX has been started):
xset +fp pmpublic\
xfd -fn -adobe-Helvetica-medium-i-normal--0-2000-75-75-p-0-iso8859-1
Tip: This XFD window will be much larger than your display
screen. Use the PM Alt-F7 key sequence and mouse
movement in order to move this window around.
This will create a big 200 point font in which each character is about 200
pixels high!
Note: X requires that a scaled font request contain exactly 14 dashes!
Note: Most scalable PM Public fonts are kerned, which means that the
appearance of text cannot be reliably predicted by the X application.
Note: PMX does not support double-byte character set (DBCS) PM fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.2. Customizing PMX Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The X Window System server uses font files to display text for client
applications. The OS/2 X Window System server program includes X Window System
fonts supplied from the MIT X11R5 distribution as well as those supplied by IBM
AIX X Window System products. These files have a file extension of either .xfn
(native PM font format) or .PCF (portable compiled font) and are located in the
X11\MISC and X11\75DPI subdirectories.
By default, PMX.EXE searches for the font files in X11\MISC, then in X11\75DPI,
and then in X11\SPEEDO. You can change the default font directories and search
order by using the -fp option of PMX.EXE. You can also override the defaults
by using the fp parameter of the xset command. However, it is recommended that
you do not place the X11\SPEEDO directory first on the font path. PMX has
problems in this situation, especially if the fonts get used for menus.
X Window System fonts that your client applications need, but that are not
included with OS/2, can be imported from other systems for use with the OS/2 X
Window System server. For information about enhancing the font support for the
OS/2 X Window System server with X Window System fonts from other systems, see
Using Font Utilities to Customize Your System.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.2.1. How the Server Accesses Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX can use a wide variety of font formats, usually font files with a file name
extension of either .XFN, .SPD or .PCF The X Window System server locates and
accesses font files by using the FONTS.DIR and FONTS.ALI files of the
directories in the font path. There must be exactly one FONTS.DIR file and no
more than one FONTS.ALI file in each directory in the font path. The FONTS.DIR
and FONTS.ALI files map X Window System logical font names, as specified to the
X Window System server by the requesting X Window System client applications,
to font file names known to the local server. The mapping of X Window System
logical font names to file names removes the need for the X Window System
clients to know about the local file system characteristics and naming
conventions.
Related Topic:
Using Font Servers
Font Server Utilities
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.2.2. The Font Search Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Font information is in a search path defined to the server. The font path can
be changed dynamically as the server runs by using the XSET utility or X Window
System protocol messages from clients. It can also be changed dynamically from
the PMX Server Window by:
1. Selecting Commands menu item
2. Selecting Configuration cascading menu
3. Selecting Current settings
4. Selecting Fonts tab
5. Changing the default font path
6. Closing the notebook
7. Selecting the Apply button
The server searches for a file named FONTS.DIR and a file named FONTS.ALI in
each directory in the font path. These files map logical font names to the
font files in that directory.
Additional directories with FONTS.DIR and FONTS.ALI files can be specified.
For example, assume that \MYFONTS is on your C drive, and TCP/IP for OS/2 is
installed in the directory that begins with D:\TCPIP; you can start the X
Window System server with the miscellaneous, 75 dpi, Speedo fonts, and also
your own personal fonts, in the directory C:\MYFONTS, by specifying the
following command:
pmx -fp d:\tcpip\X11\misc,d:\tcpip\X11\75dpi,d:\tcpip\X11\speedo,c:\myfonts
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.2.3. The FONTS.DIR Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
FONTS.DIR files are created using the MKFONTDR program after you compile the
fonts. For more information on the MKFONTDR program, see Build the Font
Directory-MKFONTDR. The FONTS.DIR files contain a list of all the font files
(and the logical font names) in a directory. Fonts created with conventions
that have become standard for the X Window System since Release 3 have names
that are long and contain information about the font. You can use wild card
characters to simplify the search for a font when a client program specifies a
font. You can use either uppercase or lowercase in your font patterns because
the case of letters in logical font names is ignored.
The first line of the FONTS.DIR file contains an integer specifying the number
of fonts. The rest of the lines in the file contain two items of information,
separated by one or more blanks. The first item on each line is the OS/2 file
name. An example of file name is 9X15.PCF. The second item on each line is
the logical font name by which the font is known to the X Window System server.
An example of a font name is 9x15. The logical font name is extracted from
information in the font file and is not derived from the OS/2 file name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.2.4. The FONTS.ALI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The FONTS.ALI file (in UNIX, this would be FONTS.ALIAS) maps new names to
existing fonts and can be put in any directory of the font path. Use a text
editor if you need to edit this file. Each line in the file normally contains
two items, separated by one or more blanks. The first item is the alias you use
for a font. The second item is a font-name pattern.
To embed white space in either the alias or the logical font name pattern,
enclose the alias or the pattern in double-quotation marks. To embed a
double-quotation mark (or any other special character), precede the character
with a backslash.
When a client specifies a font alias, the name it refers to is searched for by
looking through each font directory (FONTS.DIR file). This means that the
aliases do not have to refer to the fonts in the same directory as the
FONTS.ALI file.
If the string FILE_NAMES_ALIASES stands alone on a line in the FONTS.ALI file,
each font file name in the directory (without its .xfn or .PCF extension) is
used as an alias for that font.
Each directory in the font path can have a FONTS.ALI file. When PMX is
installed, a FONTS.DIR and FONTS.ALI file are installed in each font directory.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.3. Using Font Utilities to Customize Your System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This section describes how to use font utilities to customize your system. The
X Window System server displays text by accessing font files. You can also use
fonts not included with the TCP/IP for OS/2 X Window System server support.
For example, you might have an X Window System client application requiring a
special font that is available on a UNIX or AIX machine. You can install the
needed fonts on the workstation for use by the X Window System server program.
To install an additional font:
1. Locate the source file for the font you want to install. For example, X
Window System font source files have a file extension of BDF (such as
COURB08.BDF).
If can locate a PCF version of the new font, you can skip the next two
steps and copy or download the binary .PCF file into the target font
directory.
2. Copy or download the .BDF font source file to a disk drive on your
workstation.
3. Compile the font source file using the X Window System font compiler
utility, BDFTOPM.
BDFTOPM takes the .BDF font source file as input and creates a new file in
native PM font format (.xfn font). This new file has a file extension of
.xfn (such as COURB08.xfn) and contains information that the OS/2 X Window
System server uses to create character images for display in X Window
System. All fonts that are used with the OS/2 X Window System server must
have been compiled using the BDFTOPM, BDFTOPCF, or PCFTOPM utilities.
Note: If the font you are compiling is a double-byte character set (DBCS)
font with more than 256 characters, you should use the BDFTOPCF utility.
4. After the font is compiled, place the resulting .xfn or .PCF file into a
directory where the OS/2 X Window System server can find it. It is best to
create separate font subdirectories for any additional fonts that do not
come with PMX. If you place custom fonts in a default X Window System font
directory (for example, TCPIP\X11\MISC), there may be a font migration
problem in future PMX updates.
If you put the .xfn or .PCF file in a directory other than the one in the
default font path, identify that directory to the X Window System server by
using the font path (-fp) option when you start PMX. See Starting PMX and
How the Server Accesses Fonts for more information on specifying font
paths.
5. After you compile the X Window System font and move the file to the chosen
directory, run the MKFONTDR utility on that directory. MKFONTDR creates or
updates the FONTS.DIR file in the directory.
The OS/2 X Window System server uses the FONTS.DIR file to map a particular
logical font name, as requested by an X Window System client application,
to a font file in the same directory.
The installation of the additional font is now complete.
6. To activate these changes, you can either restart the X Window System
server or use the rehash option (-fp rehash) of the XSET utility. Either
of these actions causes the server to reread the FONTS.DIR files in the
directories of the current font paths.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.3.1. Compile .xfn PM Fonts-BDFTOPM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
BDFTOPM converts a bitmap display (BDF) font to a native PM format (.xfn) font.
The text writing performance of the PMX server is significantly increased when
.xfn fonts are used.
To run BDFTOPM, issue the bdftopm command:
ΓöÇΓöÇbdftopmΓöÇΓöÇ -o output_filename.xfnΓöÇΓöÇ input_filenameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
-o output_filename.xfn
Allows you to specify the name of the output PM font file. The output file
name must end with a .xfn extension spelled out in lower case letters.
input_filename
Specifies the name of the input file containing the BDF font.
An example of bdftopm command is:
bdftopm -o cursor.xfn cursor.bdf
Note: bdftopm does not write an .xfn font to stdout, like bdftopcf does.
Note: bdftopm cannot compile double-byte character set (DBCS) fonts which
contain more than 256 characters. PCF font format must be used for DBCS fonts;
use bdftopcf.
Warning: mkfontdr requires all of the fonts in a single subdirectory to be
unique. Be sure, after you convert .BDF or .PCF fonts to .xfn format, that you
remove those original .BDF or .PCF fonts from the subdirectory before you run
mkfontdr. Otherwise, mkfontdr will give an error message about duplicate fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.3.2. Convert .PCF Fonts to PM-PCFTOPM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PCFTOPM converts a Portable Compiled Format (PCF) font to a native PM format
(.xfn) font. The text writing performance of the PMX server is significantly
increased when .xfn fonts are used.
To run PCFTOPM, issue the pcftopm command:
ΓöÇΓöÇpcftopmΓöÇΓöÇ -o output_filename.xfnΓöÇΓöÇ input_filenameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
-o output_filename.xfn
Allows you to specify the name of the output PM font file. The output file
name must end with a .xfn extension spelled out in lower case letters.
input_filename
Specifies the name of the input file containing the PCF font.
An example of pcftopm command is:
pcftopm -o cursor.xfn cursor.pcf
Note: pcftopm does not write an .xfn font to stdout, like bdftopcf does.
Note: pcftopm cannot compile double-byte character set (DBCS) fonts which
contain more than 256 characters. PCF font format must be used for DBCS fonts.
Warning: mkfontdr requires all of the fonts in a single subdirectory to be
unique. Be sure, after you convert .BDF or .PCF fonts to .xfn format, that you
remove those original .BDF or .PCF fonts from the subdirectory before you run
mkfontdr. Otherwise, mkfontdr will give an error message about duplicate fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.3.3. Compile PCF Fonts-BDFTOPCF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
BDFTOPCF converts bitmap display fonts (BDF) to portable compiled format (PCF)
fonts. The PMX server can use PCF fonts.
To run BDFTOPCF, issue the bdftopcf command:
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéBDFTOPCF Functions Operands Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéConversion -i Γöé
Γöé -t Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéOrder -l Γöé
Γöé -L Γöé
Γöé -m Γöé
Γöé -M Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional -filename Γöé
Γöé -o Γöé
Γöé -p Γöé
Γöé -u Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.4. Conversion Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇbdftopcfΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -iΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -tΓöÇΓöÿ
-i
Inhibits the normal computation of ink metrics. When a font has glyph images
that do not fill the bitmap image (for example, the on pixels do not extend
to the edges of the metrics), the bdftopcf command computes the actual ink
metrics and places them in the .PCF file. The -t parameter inhibits this
behavior.
-t
Specifies that bdftopcf converts fonts into terminal fonts when possible. A
terminal font has each glyph image padded to the same size. The X WIndow
System server can usually render these types of fonts more quickly.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.5. Order Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇbdftopcfΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -lΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -LΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -mΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -MΓöÇΓöÿ
-l
Sets the font bit order to the least significant bit first. For example, the
left-most bit on the screen will be in the least valued bit in each unit.
-L
Sets the font byte order to least significant byte first. All multibyte data
in the file name (metrics, bitmaps, and so on) will be written in
least-significant-byte-first format.
-m
Sets the font bit order to most significant bit first. Bits for each glyph
will be placed in this order. For example, the left most bit on the screen
will be in the highest valued bit in each unit.
-M
Sets the font byte order to most significant byte first. All multibyte data
in the file (metrics, bitmaps, and everything else) will be written
most-significant-byte-first format.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.6. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇbdftopcfΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇfilenameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -o output_filenameΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -pnΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -unΓöÇΓöÿ
filename
Specifies the name of the file containing the BDF font.
-o output_filename
By default, bdftopcf writes the .PCF file to standard output; this option
gives the name of a file to be used instead.
-p n
Sets the font glyph padding. Each glyph in the font will have each scanline
padded to a multiple of n bytes, where n is 1, 2, 4, or 8.
-u n
Sets the font scanline unit. When the font bit order is different from the
font byte order, the scanline unit n describes what unit of data (in bytes)
is to be swapped. The unit n can be 1, 2, or 4.
Note:
o If BDFTOPCF is started with no options, it silently waits for the data that
describes a BDF font to be typed in. You can press Ctrl-Z and then press
Enter to stop BDFTOPCF.
o Some X Window System servers automatically convert a BDF font to a PCF font
using the BDFTOPCF program if the font is not in PCF form. These servers can
also use a program called COMPRESS to decompress either the BDF or the PCF
form if it is in compressed form. The OS/2 server accepts fonts only in PCF
form, so fonts must be compiled to that form for OS/2.
o If the -o option is not specified, the output data will be directed to
standard output, which is usually the screen.
The following example shows how to compile the cursor font:
bdftopcf cursor.bdf -o cursor.pcf
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.6.1. Build the Font Directory-MKFONTDR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The MKFONTDR utility creates a FONTS.DIR file that the server uses to translate
logical font name designations to font file names.
A font directory can contain a mix of .xfn and .pcf fonts as long as each font
is unique. The FONTS.DIR file contains a list of all of the .xfn and .pcf font
files contained in the same directory.
The MKFONTDR program takes an optional list of directories as its arguments. If
a directory name is not given, it looks in the current directory. For each
directory argument, MKFONTDR reads all of the font files in the directory,
searching for properties named FONT in the files, or (failing that) the name of
the file stripped of its extension. These are used as logical font names,
which are written out to the file FONTS.DIR in the directory along with the
name of the font file.
To create a FONTS.DIR file, issue the mkfontdr command:
ΓöîΓöÇ current directoryΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇmkfontdrΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γöé ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ Γöé
Γöé Γöé Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ directoryΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
directory The name of the directory in which the fonts reside. This will be
used to create the fonts.dir font listing. The default directory is
your current directory.
Warning: mkfontdr requires all of the fonts in a single directory to be
unique. Be sure, after you convert .BDF or .PCF fonts to .xfn format, that you
remove those original .BDF or .PCF fonts from the directory before you run
mkfontdr. Otherwise, mkfontdr will give an error message about duplicate fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.6.2. Build the PM Public Font List-MKFONTDR -pmpublic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX can use PM public system fonts in X application windows. When pmpublic\
occurs in the PMX font path, PMX looks for a special FONTS.DIR listing of PM
public system fonts. This special FONTS.DIR file must be located in the
subdirectory pointed to by the ETC environment variable.
To create the FONTS.DIR file for PM public fonts, issue this special form of
the mkfontdr command:
ΓöÇΓöÇmkfontdrΓöÇΓöÇ -pmpublicΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
-pmpublic Creates a new fonts.dir file in the directory pointed to by the ETC
environment variable. This fonts.dir file contains a list of all the
PM public fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.7. Default font path help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Default font path field to specify the search path for font
information. The server searches for the FONTS.DIR and FONTS.ALI files in each
directory in the font path. These files map logical font names to the font
file names in that directory.
Additional directories with FONTS.DIR and FONTS.ALI files can be specified by
separating the directories with a comma.
The default for the server is TCPIP\X11\MISC,TCPIP\X11\75DPI.
Related Topics:
Using Font Servers
Font Server Utilities
PM Public fonts (pmpublic\)
X Font Support
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7.8. Default font file name help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Default font field to set the logical name of the default font for the
server. The default for the server is a font named fixed.
Related Topics:
X Font Support
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8. Cut/Paste Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this page to specify how to manage cut and paste operations. Cutting and
pasting is a convenient way for users to transfer data to and from X Window
System client applications and Presentation Manager or Win-OS/2 applications.
For information on cut and paste options, see Using the PM Clipboard with PMX.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.1. How the Cut Buffer Works Within PMX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When the user copies or cuts data from an X Window System client application,
the application transfers the data to the cut buffer and has no further
responsibility for the data. When the user pastes the data into another X
Window System client application, that application gets the data from the cut
buffer.
PMX, itself, always treats cut and paste data this way. PMX Window System
always cuts data from an X Window System client into CUT_BUFFER0. Any
subsequent cut operations overlay the previous cut, with the cut data always
going into CUT_BUFFER0. PMX Window System always pastes data to an X Window
System client from CUT_BUFFER0. Any subsequent paste operations continue to
get the same data from CUT_BUFFER0 until the data is changed by a subsequent
cut.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.2. Cut-Buffer Rotation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Some X Window System client applications, xedit for example, rotate the data in
the cut buffer. The cut buffer is actually made of a stack of eight separate
buffers, whose property names are:
o CUT_BUFFER0
o CUT_BUFFER1
o CUT_BUFFER2
o CUT_BUFFER3
o CUT_BUFFER4
o CUT_BUFFER5
o CUT_BUFFER6
o CUT_BUFFER7
As many as eight different text blocks can reside in the cut buffer. Data goes
first into CUT_BUFFER0. When another piece of data is added to the cut buffer,
it goes into CUT_BUFFER0, and the data that was in CUT_BUFFER0 is moved to
CUT_BUFFER1. As each new piece of data is added to the cut buffer, all
existing data is moved to the next cut buffer.
Data is retrieved from the cut buffer in first-in-last-out order. So data is
always retrieved from CUT_BUFFER0, and data in the other cut buffers moves one
buffer forward toward CUT_BUFFER0. In other words, data moves from CUT_BUFFER1
to CUT_BUFFER0, from CUT_BUFFER2 to CUT_BUFFER1, and so on.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.3. How PMX Shares Cut Buffer Data with PM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX shares cut buffer data with PM using this procedure:
1. PMX monitors the contents of CUT_BUFFER0.
2. When the contents of CUT_BUFFER0 change (because of a cut), PMX transfers
the text from CUT_BUFFER0 to the PM clipboard. That data is then available
to PM applications.
3. When an X Window System client application requests the contents of
CUT_BUFFER0 (to do a paste) PMX checks the PM clipboard.
4. If there is text in the PM clipboard, PMX transfers it to CUT_BUFFER0 so
the X Window System client can use it.
Note: Because X Window System client applications handle cut buffers
inconsistently, PMX does not rotate data in cut buffers. Instead, PMX
Window System always cuts data from X Window System client application
into CUT_BUFFER0, and pastes X Window System client data from
CUT_BUFFER0. PMX does not push the cut buffers before placing text
from the PM clipboard into CUT_BUFFER0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.4. Using the PM Clipboard with PMX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
OS/2's Presentation Manager and the X Window System both provide a way to share
data among applications using cutting, copying, and pasting. The two systems
handle these operations differently, however. PMX provides facilities for
sharing data between applications running under PM and those running as clients
of PMX.
PMX uses some of the X Window System standard data transfer conventions to
manage cutting, copying, and pasting. The following information summarizes how
PMX shares X Window System client application data with PM applications. Use
the Cut/Paste section of the TCP/IP configuration notebook to select one of
these data transfer options, as shown in Cut/Paste Page of TCPIPCFG:
o Turn off PMX cut/paste
o Cut buffer (text only)
o PRIMARY, SECONDARY, or CLIPBOARD selection
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.5. Selections ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A selection is a transaction-oriented mechanism designed to allow transferring
any type of data between X Window System client applications. PMX supports the
transfer of text and image data between X Window System client applications by
connecting the selection mechanism to the PM clipboard.
The selection mechanism can be enabled by choosing one of the three supported
selections (PRIMARY, SECONDARY, or CLIPBOARD selection) on page 7 of the PMX
configuration notebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.6. How Selections Works Within PMX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When the user copies or cuts data from an X Window System client application,
the application:
o Sets aside the data within its own window. It does not yet actually transfer
the data.
o Registers with PMX that it owns one of the following selection names:
PRIMARY Conventionally used for general data transfer
SECONDARY Conventionally used for transferring data without disturbing
the primary selection
CLIPBOARD Conventionally used as the means for cutting and pasting data
between X Window System client applications
The X Window System client application from which the user cut or copied the
data is said to own the selection name; it is called the selection owner.
Whenever any other X Window System client application wishes to paste the data
set aside by the selection owner, the other client sends the owner a request
for data transfer. When the selection owner receives the data transfer
request, the owner copies the data into a window property specified by the
requesting X Window System client application. The paste operation is then
complete.
Note: Selection ownership does not change unless a different X Window System
client application sets aside data and makes it available via the same
selection name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.7. Sharing Selection Data With PM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX supports the selection mechanism by forcing ownership of the selection. At
startup, the PMX root window becomes the owner of the specified selection
(PRIMARY, SECONDARY, or CLIPBOARD). If an X Window System client wants to
paste a selection, that X Window System client requests the data from the owner
(which is PMX). PMX then tries to match the requested target format with the
current contents of the PM clipboard. If the data is available, it is
transferred to the X Window System client. If the data is not available, the
request is rejected.
When an X Window System client makes a selection (a cut or copy operation),
that X Window System client takes ownership of the selection from PMX. PMX
responds by requesting the data in a number of different formats (specifically,
TEXT and BITMAP formats). If PMX receives data, it places the data on the PM
public clipboard. At the end of the transaction, PMX resumes ownership of the
selection. This form of cut and paste allows for the seamless transfer of text
and graphic images between X and PM environments.
With this mode, the only available target formats for X selections are STRING,
PIXMAP, and BITMAP (a two-color PIXMAP). X Window System clients that rely on
other targets cannot function properly with the cut-and-paste option enabled.
You can use the cut/paste between X and PM menu item, to toggle the function on
and off, so that these clients can function. When you toggle this menu item
off, the cut-and-paste function between X and PM is disabled. But your
cut-and-paste options are retained so that they are in effect when you toggle
the function on again.
Note: If you select the No cut/paste between X and PM option, the menu item
is disabled. In this case, you should first select the cut/paste
option in the configuration notebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.8. Cut Buffers Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To use the cut buffers as a means of cutting and pasting between X and OS/2
applications, select the Cut Buffers (text only) option from the PMX
configuration notebook. Then close the notebook and select Apply or Save and
Apply to apply the setting to PMX. Now start the text-related applications in
X, PM, and WIN-OS/2 environments. To see which X Window System clients support
cut-and-paste operations using cut buffers, check the manual pages for the
client of interest. Some clients that use this method are xterm and xedit.
You can simply cut and paste among all three types of applications.
Using xterm, for example, you can use mouse button 1 to select the beginning of
the desired selection, and use mouse button 3 at the end of the selection.
xterm highlights the selection and puts it in CUT_BUFFER0. Now go to any other
X, PM, or WIN-OS/2 application and select the paste option; the contents of
CUT_BUFFER0 will be pasted into the application.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.9. Selections Example ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To use selections as a means of cutting and pasting between X and OS/2, select
PRIMARY, SECONDARY, or CLIPBOARD in the PMX configuration notebook. Now close
the notebook and select Apply or Save and Apply to apply the setting to PMX.
Start applications that support cut-and-paste operations for text and images.
The X Window System clients that support the selection mechanism are limited,
and include the X11R5 versions of xterm, xedit, xmag, and bitmap.
When using xmag, for example, if you click on the "select" button, it will take
ownership of the PRIMARY selection. If PRIMARY is the selection being
monitored by PMX, then it will ask for both text and bitmaps. In turn, xmag
will give PMX the data and it will be placed on the PM public clipboard. In
the case of xmag, it will give the text "Hello, world." as well as the current
image in it's main window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.10. Disable cut/paste help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Turn off PMX cut/paste option to disable the cut and paste function
between X and OS/2, while not affecting cut and paste between X clients. When
this option is selected, the "Cut/paste between X and PM" menu item is
disabled, since toggling cut and paste on and off is not possible when the
function is not being implemented.
Related Topic:
Cut and Paste Support
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.11. Cut buffer help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Cut buffer (text only) option to select a cut buffer as the X data
transfer mechanism.
A cut buffer is a named property on the root window which can contain text. A
cut buffer cannot be used to transfer an image. It is passive in the sense
that it is just a container.
Related Topics:
Cut and Paste Support
Cut Buffers Example
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.12. PRIMARY selection help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the PRIMARY selection option to specify the principal selection name for
data transfer. This is one of three selection names that X applications should
support, according to ICCCM conventions.
Related Topics:
Cut and Paste Support
Selections
Selections Example
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.13. SECONDARY selection help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the SECONDARY selection option to specify an alternative selection name for
transferring data without disturbing the PRIMARY selection. This is one of
three selection names that X applications should support, according to ICCCM
conventions.
Related Topics:
Cut and Paste Support
Selections
Selections Example
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.14. CLIPBOARD selection help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the CLIPBOARD selection option to specify the selection name used
specifically to support cut and paste transfers between X applications. This
is one of three selection names that X applications should support, according
to ICCCM conventions.
Related Topics:
Cut and Paste Support
Selections
Selections Example
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8.15. Data Transfer Timeout Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Data transfer timeout field specifies how many seconds PMX waits for data
it has requested from an X Window System client application. If the number of
seconds specified in this field passes after PMX has requested data, PMX
abandons the request.
This value is particularly important if you are trying to paste data from an X
Window System client application running from a remote host. If the value is
too low, the application may not be able to get the data through the network to
you in time. If the value is too high and the application is not responding,
your system will be tied up until the number of seconds specified in this field
has passed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9. Other Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this page to define mouse options and other miscellaneous options defining
the way PMX operates. For information on defining these options manually, see
the following parameters in Using the OS/2 X Window System Server:
o -bc
o -i, -iconify
o -nocopyright
o -nocascade
o -logpath
o -r
o -shape
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9.1. Minimize at startup help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Minimize at startup option to automatically minimize PMX to a desktop
icon when started.
When you deselect this option, the server window is displayed after
initialization.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9.2. Window cascade help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If the Cascade application windows option is selected, windows that are not
initially positioned by user specifications will be cascaded down the screen.
If this option is not selected, the server will not cascade windows if the
application provides an initial location.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9.3. Keyboard autorepeat help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If the Keyboard autorepeat option is selected, the server turns on the
automatic repeating of keys. This function can be turned off by deselecting
this option.
This function is selected by default.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9.4. Display copyright help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If the Display copyright at startup option is selected, PMX product information
is displayed each time the server is started.
Deselecting this option tells the server to bypass the product information box
each time the server is started.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9.5. Log file path help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Log file path option to specify the directory where the PMX.LOG log
file resides. The default is specified by the ETC environment variable. If
the PMX files are stored on a shared, read-only disk, this allows the log file
to be placed elsewhere.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9.6. Permit old bugs help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use Permit old bugs to permit certain old broken clients to function properly.
Examples of clients that will be affected by this setting are X11R2 and R3
versions of xterm.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9.7. Shape extension help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use Enable shape extension to start PMX with shape extension installed. This
will allow nonrectangular windows to be created by clients, with the exception
of top-level windows. Top level windows created with the shape extension will
be embedded in a rectangular Presentation Manager window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9.8. Log font requests help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use Log Fonts to cause PMX to trace font requests made by X applications.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.10. Setting PMX to Start Automatically ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Most users will want to have PMX start automatically when they start their
workstations. You can use the configuration notebook program to do this. The
configuration notebook program:
1. Adds a line, to the TCPSTART.CMD file, that starts PMX by calling XINIT.
TCP/IP for OS/2 uses TCPSTART.CMD to start the services and programs that
you select on the AutoStart page in TCPIPCFG. XINIT is a command file that
starts PMX; see XINIT for more information.
2. Adds an icon, to the OS/2 STARTUP folder, that calls TCPSTART.CMD. Icons
in the STARTUP folder run automatically when you start your workstation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.11. Additional Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can also:
o Install additional fonts. See Customizing PMX Fonts, for more information.
o Modify the color database. See Color Table Support for more information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.12. Setting Environment Variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To function properly, PMX needs certain environment variables to be set on your
workstation. Environment variables can be set two ways:
o Permanently in your CONFIG.SYS file
o Temporarily at an OS/2 prompt
Setting environment variable in your CONFIG.SYS file is the usual way of
setting an environment variable. Using this method, the environment variable
will be set every time you start your workstation. When you use the TCP/IP
installation program, you can let it update environment variables in your
CONFIG.SYS file. Remember to reboot your system to implement changes made to
the CONFIG.SYS file.
In some cases, you might not want to set an environment variable in the
CONFIG.SYS file. Perhaps you need to modify an environment variable
temporarily. You can set an environment variable for an OS/2 window or
full-screen session.
For example, to set the ETC environment variable to C:\TCPIP\ETC\COVEY, type
this at the OS/2 prompt:
SET ETC=C:\TCPIP\ETC\COVEY
Remember that the environment variable will only be set for the OS/2 session in
which you set it. Also, the setting will be cleared when you shut off or
reboot your workstation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.13. Environment Variables Used by PMX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX uses the following environment variables:
XFILES
Many of the database files (such as RGB.TXT) required by PMX for
initialization and operation are installed by default in a subdirectory
named X11.
You can locate the X11 subdirectory tree wherever you prefer, as long as you
also set the corresponding environment variable XFILES. In this book, the
location of the X11 subdirectory is represented as X11. For a particular
configuration, X11 represents the subdirectory to which the XFILES
environment variable points.
For example, if XFILES=C:\TCPIP\X11, PMX looks for files it needs in that
subdirectory or its subdirectories.
ETC
PMX uses the ETC environment variable to find the X0HOSTS file and as the
location for writing the PMX.LOG file. For example, if ETC=C:\TCPIP\ETC,
PMX looks for the X0HOSTS file in that subdirectory. It is also here that
PMX writes and reads the PMX.INI file, which contains the PMX settings from
TCPIPCFG.
DISPLAY
PMX uses the DISPLAY environment variable to run XMODMAP. XINIT displays an
error message and ends if it finds that DISPLAY has not been set. See XINIT
for more information.
The value for DISPLAY has the format:
host:dpy
The value of host must be your host address or a host name that can be
resolved to your host address. A host name can be resolved to a host
address through queries to the network name server, if one is present, or
through reference to an entry in your HOSTS file.
The value of dpy is the window number, and is usually set to 0.
For example, if your host internet address is 9.67.30.44 and your host name
is DINGBAT, you could set the DISPLAY environment variable this way:
SET DISPLAY=9.67.30.44:0
or
SET DISPLAY=dingbat:0
When you use your host internet address, there is no need to translate your
host name to your internet address.
LANG
PMX uses this environment variable, if present, to supply the value for the
-lang parameter.
PMXUNIX
PMX uses this environment variable, if present, to supply the value for the
-unix parameter.
PMXKEYBOARD
PMX uses this environment variable, if present, to supply the value for the
-k parameter.
PMXFLAGS
PMX uses this environment variable, if present, to supply additional XINIT
parameters. For example, if you always wanted to include the -nocascade and
-nocopyright parameters when starting PMX, you would set the parameter like
this:
SET PMXFLAGS=-nocascade -nocopyright
XINIT adds the parameters you specify in this environment variable before
the parameters you specify explicitly with the XINIT command.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14. Files Used by PMX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX accesses a number of files during initialization and operation.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéTask ΓöéFile Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéLog information ΓöéPMX.LOG Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAuthorize access to a client host ΓöéX0HOSTS Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDefine color names ΓöéRGB.TXT Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDraw text ΓöéPMX font files Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBackup of PMX.LOG ΓöéPMXBACK.LOG Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
By default, these files are installed in the X11 subdirectory.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14.1. Log File (PMX.LOG) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX writes some information to a file called PMX.LOG in the directory named in
the ETC environment variable. If PMX cannot open this file for writing, PMX
does not run. This may be a problem if you are running PMX from a read-only
disk on a remote host. To get around such problems, you can make PMX write to
the PMX.LOG file in a different directory by using the -logpath command line
parameter. See Using the OS/2 X Window System Server, for more information.
If PMX discovers errors, it writes the information in PMX.LOG, which can be
useful when reporting these errors to IBM. This file is cleared and reused
every time you run PMX. PMX.LOG is automatically backed up to PMXBACK.LOG.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14.2. Client Host Authorization File (X0HOSTS) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX uses the X0HOSTS file to identify the X Window System client hosts that are
authorized to connect to PMX. This file is not supplied with PMX; you create
it using TCPIPCFG or a text editor. The X0HOSTS file for PMX corresponds to
the X0.hosts file on a UNIX host running the X Window System server.
In the X0HOSTS file, you put only one host name on each line. The names in
X0HOSTS should be either names recognized by your TCP/IP network name server or
names included in your HOSTS file. Use names only, not internet addresses. An
example of the X0HOSTS file follows:
mpw.tcpipdev.rtp.ibm.com
glenns-mod80
als-mod95
PMX looks for the X0HOSTS file in the directory named in the ETC environment
variable. If PMX cannot find the X0HOSTS file in the directory named by the
ETC environment variable, an X Window System client application cannot access
PMX unless the XHOST utility is used to permit access.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14.3. Color Database File (RGB.TXT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
By default, the color database is found in the file X11\RGB.TXT. On a UNIX
Window System server, this file is used as the source of a small relational
database. PMX uses this file directly, reading it into memory and keeping it
sorted by color name. The file shows a mapping between a large number of color
names and some red-green-blue values. There is more than one example color file
included with PMX. You can customize the color database by editing RGB.TXT with
a text editor and changing the red, green, and blue values associated with a
particular color name. You can also add color names and associated red, green,
and blue values to create new colors in the database.
Each line in the color database has the red, green, and blue field components,
followed by the name in ASCII. These color components range in value from 0
(no color) to 255 (brightest). For example, a line specifying the brightest
green would appear as follows in the RGB.TXT file:
0 255 0 Brightgreen
255 0 0 Brightred
0 0 255 Brightblue
100 0 100 Purple
PMX uses information from Presentation Manager to map these values to indexes
into Presentation Manager color tables and palettes. Since PMX reads the data
from the color database only when it is starting up, edits to the database file
do not cause concurrent changes in colors. Also, applications do not
necessarily use this database to choose colors for display. They might work
with red, green, and blue values directly and not use color names at all.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14.4. PMX Font Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX uses font files to display text for X Window System client applications.
PMX includes X Window System fonts supplied from the MIT X11R5 distribution as
well as some fonts supplied by IBM AIX X Window System products.
For more information about PMX font support, see Customizing PMX Fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14.5. PMXBACK.LOG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX copies the file PMX.LOG to PMXBACK.LOG before changes are made to PMX.LOG
so that you can look at the errors that were logged in PMX.LOG.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Verifying that PMX is Correctly Installed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To verify that you have correctly installed PMX:
1. Ping your host name to verify that your workstation is functioning as a
TCP/IP host.
2. Start PMX.
3. Run the Hello World program.
4. Ping a remote host that has X Window System client applications.
5. Log onto a remote host that has X Window System client applications.
6. Set the display environment variable on the remote host.
7. Run an X Window System client application on a remote host.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. PING Your Host Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
After installing PMX on your workstation, test to see whether your workstation
is functioning properly as a TCP/IP host. If, for example, your host name is
billy, type:
ping billy
at an OS/2 command prompt and press Enter.
Something similar to the following output appears:
PING billy: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 1.1.1.1: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms
64 bytes from 1.1.1.1: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms
64 bytes from 1.1.1.1: icmp_seq=2. time=0. ms
64 bytes from 1.1.1.1: icmp_seq=3. time=0. ms
.
.
.
You can stop the PING program by pressing Ctrl+C.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. Start PMX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To start PMX, type xinit at an OS/2 command prompt and press Enter. PMX
starts, followed by PMXWAIT, and then XMODMAP. If your XINIT.CMD file has been
modified by a system administrator, you may also see other actions.
For more information about starting PMX, see Using the OS/2 X Window System
Server.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. Running the Hello World Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX includes a Hello World program, an X Window System client application that
runs on OS/2 and verifies that PMX has been set up correctly. When you see a
message in the PMX window that says Ready for clients, you can type:
start xhello
at an OS/2 command prompt and press Enter. The Hello World window appears,
verifying that PMX is running and that X Window System client applications on
your workstation can run as clients of PMX.
You can also enter the XHELLO command with any of its operands. (You can enter
the XHELLO operands in any order.)
ΓöÇΓöÇxhelloΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -display ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ:serverΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇhostΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ.screenΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -fn fontnameΓöÇΓöÿ
-display host:server.screen Specifies the display, server, and screen to
connect to. host is the host name of the physical display, server
specifies the server number, and screen specifies the screen number.
For example:
-display your_node:0.1
specifies screen 1 of server 0 on the display named by your_node.
Either, or both, the host name and screen can be omitted. If the
host name is omitted, the local display is assumed. If the screen is
omitted, screen 0 is assumed, and the period is not needed.
-fn fontname Specifies the name of the font.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. PING a Remote Host that Has X Window System Client Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can use PMX to start useful X Window System client applications on remote
hosts and have them appear on your workstation. Before trying to start one of
these programs, use the PING program to verify that you can access the remote
host. For example, if the X Window System client applications are on a host
with a host name of reba, type:
ping reba
at an OS/2 command prompt and press Enter. Press Ctrl+C to stop the PING
program.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. Log on to a Remote Host that Has X Window System Client Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
After verifying access, log on to the remote host using a terminal emulator
such as the one that comes with the TCP/IP for OS/2 Base Kit, Telnet. Assume
that you use Telnet and that reba is a UNIX machine. At an OS/2 command
prompt, enter:
telnet -t vt220 reba
This starts another Presentation Manager window in which Telnet is running.
You will see some initial information displayed and then you will be prompted
for a user id and a password.
After you have logged on successfully, you may need to tell the host that your
terminal is a VT220. You will be prompted with a $ or a %, depending upon
which command interpreter is in control. Type the line below that begins with
the shell prompt character on your screen.
$ set TERM=vt220 ; export TERM -- BSH (Bourne Shell)
$ export TERM=vt220 -- KSH (Korn Shell)
% setenv TERM vt220 -- CSH (C Shell)
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. Set the Display Environment Variable on the Remote Host ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Most X Window System client applications use the DISPLAY environment variable
to tell where the X Window System server is. Type the line below that begins
with the shell prompt character on your screen.
$ set DISPLAY=os2host:0 ; export DISPLAY -- BSH (Bourne Shell)
$ export DISPLAY=os2host:0 -- KSH (Korn Shell)
% setenv DISPLAY os2host:0 -- CSH (C Shell)
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. Run an X Window System Client Application on the Remote Host ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When you have set your display environment variable on the remote host, you can
run X Window System client applications. For example, to run the X calculator
application, type:
xcalc &
in the VT220 window and press Enter. This starts the XCALC program and allows
you to continue sending more commands. If your UNIX system is AIX, you can
type info & and press Enter to start InfoExplorer, the on-line information
facility for AIX.
There are other ways to start programs in a host machine. You can use the
REXEC program without logging on by using a terminal emulator. You will still
need a user id on the machine, and you will need to ensure that the right
environment is set up. For example, to log on to reba, which is an AIX
workstation, type the following at the OS/2 prompt and press Enter:
rexec reba -l userid -p password aixterm -display os2host:0 -fn rom14 &
See Issue a Command on a Remote Host-REXEC for more information on the REXEC
command. You may need help from a system administrator if you are not very
familiar with your host environment.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Using the OS/2 X Window System Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
After you install and configure the X Window System Server, you are ready to:
o Start PMX using the XINIT command
o Start PMX using the PMX command
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. XINIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
XINIT is an OS/2 batch file that performs certain functions and then calls PMX.
XINIT provides several useful functions that make it an easier way to start PMX
than by starting it directly with the pmx command.
To start XINIT, issue the xinit command. The xinit command has several
operands, which can be grouped by function.
Note: You can enter the xinit operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
Γöéxinit Function Operands Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéKeyboard -k Γöé
Γöé -lang Γöé
Γöé -r Γöé
Γöé -unix Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéColor -pseudocolor Γöé
Γöé -staticcolor Γöé
Γöé -palettemgr Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBug compatibility bc Γöé
Γöé -bc Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéCursor -bwcursor Γöé
Γöé -colorcursor Γöé
Γöé -lc Γöé
Γöé -pmcursor Γöé
Γöé -reversebwcursor Γöé
Γöé -reversecolorcursor Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFocus -explicitfocus Γöé
Γöé -implicitfocus Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRaise Window -clickclienttoraise Γöé
Γöé -clickframetoraise Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFont -fc Γöé
Γöé -fn Γöé
Γöé -fp Γöé
Γöé -logfonts Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéXDMCP -broadcast Γöé
Γöé -class Γöé
Γöé -cookie Γöé
Γöé -displayID Γöé
Γöé -indirect Γöé
Γöé -port Γöé
Γöé -query Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional -always Γöé
ΓöéOperands -bs Γöé
Γöé -co Γöé
Γöé -fakeBackingStore Γöé
Γöé -i Γöé
Γöé -iconify Γöé
Γöé -logpath Γöé
Γöé -nocascade Γöé
Γöé -nocopyright Γöé
Γöé -shape Γöé
Γöé -wm Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéHelp -h Γöé
Γöé -? Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
Note:
1. Many of the parameters you set on the command line can also be set in
TCPIPCFG. If you set parameters in both places, the command line
parameters will override the TCPIPCFG parameters. See Using the
Configuration Notebook Program to Configure PMX for more information on
TCPIPCFG.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.1. Keyboard Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -lang en_USΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxinitΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -lang codeΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ -unix AIX3.2ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇ -unix user_defined_UNIX_typeΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇ -unix AIX3.1ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇrΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -k nΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -rΓöÇΓöÿ
-k n
Sets the keyboard type, where n comes from the following table. Typical
USA keyboards have 101 keys; European languages usually have 102 keys. PMX
handles three types of Japanese keyboards.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéKeyboard Type -k Flag Value Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé101 key 101 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé102 key 102 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéJapanese 5576-A01 5576-A01 or 5576A01 Γöé
Γöé(106 keys) or 106A Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéJapanese 5576-001 5576-001 or 5576001 Γöé
Γöé(124 keys) or 124 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéJapanese 5576-002 5576-002 or 5576002 Γöé
Γöé(106 keys) or 106 Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-lang code
Specifies the keyboard mapping to use. If the LANG environment variable is
set, this option overrides it. The following table lists language codes
that you can use:
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéLanguage Lang=value Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBelgian nl_BE Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBelgian French fr_BE Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéCanadian French fr_CA Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDanish da_DK Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDutch nl_NL Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFinnish fi_FI Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFrench fr_FR Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéGerman de_DE Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéGreek el_GR Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéIcelandic is_IS Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéItalian it_IT Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéJapanese ja_JP Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéJapanese English en_JP Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéLatin Amer. Spanish es_LA Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéNorwegian no_NO Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPortuguese pt_PT Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSpanish es_ES Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSwedish sv_SV Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSwiss French fr_CH Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSwiss German de_CH Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéTurkish tr_TR Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéUnited Kingdom en_GB Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéUnited States en_US Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
The default is en_US
Note: The language code is not case-sensitive.
r
Turns on automatic repeating of keys on the keyboard. This is the default.
-r
Turns off automatic repeating of keys on the keyboard.
-unix type
Specifies the version of keyboard mapping files that are used. The default
is AIX3.2. Instructions for installing keyboard mapping files from other
Unix vendors can be found inside the XINIT.CMD file itself.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.2. Color Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -staticcolorΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇ -pseudocolor nΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇ -palettemgr n ΓöÇΓöÿ
-pseudocolor n
Tells PMX to provide a PseudoColor visual (modifiable color maps) for
applications to select. You can specify the -pseudocolor parameter with the
abbreviation -pseudo.
-staticcolor
Tells PMX to provide a StaticColor visual (nonmodifiable color map) for
applications to select. You can specify the -staticcolor parameter using
the abbreviation -static.
-palettemgr n
Tells PMX to provide a modifiable color table using a PM Palette Manager
palette. N is the number of colors that you want PMX applications to use.
N must be in the range of 129-236. You can specify the -palettemgr
parameter with the abbreviation -palette.
If -pseudocolor is specified, applications are told that modifiable color
tables using PM Realizable Color Tables are supported. If the applications
choose to modify or create new color tables, and the Presentation Manager
device really does not support it, an error occurs. If -staticcolor is
specified, the applications are told they can select a non-modifiable color
table, which has colors that are the same as the default physical color table
of the display. If -palettemgr parameter is specified, applications are told
that modifiable color tables using PM Palette Manager are supported. If the
applications choose to modify or create new color tables, and the Presentation
Manager device does not support it, an error occurs.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.3. Bug Compatibilty ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -bcΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇxinitΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ bcΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
The need for this option is determined by the following circumstances: Some
clients, previous to release 4, pass illegal values in some protocol requests
and some servers, previous to release 4 also, do not correctly generate errors
in these cases. Such clients, when run with a release 4 server, will terminate
abnormally or otherwise fail to operate correctly. Bug compatibility mode
explicitly reintroduces certain bugs into the X Window System server, so that
many such clients can still be run.
Note: This mode should be used with caution. The server must support the
MIT-SUNDRY-NONSTANDARD protocol extension in order for this option to work. New
application development should be done with this mode disabled.
bc
Enables bug compatibility in the server.
-bc
Disables bug compatibility in the server.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.4. Cursor Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxinitΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -lcΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -pmcursorΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ -colorcursorΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇ -bwcursorΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γö£ΓöÇ -reversecolorcursorΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇ -reversebwcursorΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-bwcursor
Indicates that PMX should use an X Window System cursor, but with only black
and white instead of colors. This is the default if the PM display device
driver does not support colored cursors.
-colorcursor
Indicates that PMX should use an X Window System colored cursor. This is the
default unless the PM display device driver does not support colored
cursors.
-lc
Doubles the dimensions of any cursor, unless it will become too large to be
a Presentation Manager cursor.
-pmcursor
Indicates that PMX should use the PM arrow as the cursor, not an X Window
System cursor.
-reversebwcursor
Indicates that PMX should use an X Window System cursor, but with only black
and white instead of colors. Black and white will be reversed from the
normal colors. For example, the normal X Window System cursor will be black
on the outside and white in the middle.
-reversecolorcursor
Indicates that PMX should use an X Window System colored cursor. The
foreground and background colors will be reversed from the normal colors.
For example, the normal X Window System cursor will be black on the outside,
and white in the middle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.5. Focus Operand ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -explicitfocusΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxinitΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -implicitfocusΓöÇΓöÿ
-explicitfocus
Tells the server to transfer focus from one client window to another only by
clicking in the window. This is the normal behavior for Presentation
Manager windows and is the default behavior for the server. This option
turns off any previous -implicitfocus option on the pmx command line.
-implicitfocus
Tells the server to transfer focus from one client window to another simply
by moving the pointer into the client area of the window. It is not
necessary to click on a client window to transfer focus to it (provided some
PMX client window already has focus). This is not the normal behavior for
Presentation Manager windows. This option turns off any previous
-explicitfocus option on the pmx command line.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.6. Raise Window Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -clickclienttoraiseΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxinitΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -clickframetoraiseΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-clickclienttoraise
Tells the server to raise windows to the top when clicks are done in the
application (client) area, which is the usual Presentation Manager behavior.
(Clicks in the PM frame also can raise the window.) This option turns off
any previous -clickframetoraise option on the pmx command line. This option
is the default.
-clickframetoraise
Tells the server to raise windows to the top only when clicks are done on
the PM frame. Clicking on the application (client) area will not raise the
window. This option turns off any previous -clickclienttoraise option on
the pmx command line.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.7. Font Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -fc cursorΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxinitΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -fc fontnameΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ -fn fixedΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -fn fontnameΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ -fp TCPIP\X11\MISC,TCPIP\X11\75DPI,TCPIP\X11\SPEEDOΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇ
Γöé ΓöîΓöÇ,ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ Γöé
Γöé Γöé Γöé
ΓööΓöÇ -fp ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇpathnameΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γöö -logfontsΓöÇΓöÿ
-fc fontname
Sets the cursor font. The default is cursor.
-fn fontname
Sets default font. The default is fixed.
-fp pathname
Sets the default font path. The default is TCPIP\X11\MISC,TCPIP\X11\75DPI,
-logfonts
Causes PMX to log font requests. This is useful if an X application is
reporting failures to find fonts. After closing PMX, examine the
\TCPIP\ETC\PMX.LOG file for information about font search patterns being
used by the X applications.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.8. XDMCP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxinitΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -broadcastΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -class display_classΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -cookie authorization_bitsΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -displayID display_idΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -indirect hostnameΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -port port_numberΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -query hostnameΓöÇΓöÿ
-broadcast
Enables broadcasting of BroadcastQuery packets to the network. The first
responding display manager will be chosen for the session with your PMX.
-class display_class
Specifies an additional display qualifier used in resource lookup for
display-specific options. (This option is untested.)
-cookie authorization_bits
When testing XDM-AUTHENTICATION-1, a private key is shared between the
server and the manager. This option sets the value of that private data.
(This option is untested.)
-displayID display_id
Specifies the manufacturer display ID for the current display. This allows
the display manager to identify each display so that it can locate the
shared key. (This option is untested.)
-indirect hostname
Enables XDMCP and sends IndirectQuery packets to the specified host. This
option asks the host display manager to start sessions between your PMX and
other hosts.
-port port_number
Use an alternate UDP port number for XDMCP packets. (This option is
untested.)
-query hostname
Enable XDMCP and send Query packets to the specified host display manager to
start a session with your PMX.
Note: Normally XDMCP is enabled by using either -query, -indirect, or
-broadcast. The X Display Manager (usually xdm) must be running on the host
machine. The system administrator for that machine also should have it set up
so that an X session to your machine is possible. For example, at minimum, you
will be presented with a LOGIN window from a session manager, if it can contact
your PMX. Your PMX host access list should include the host that your PMX will
have the session with. The host user ID that you use to log in should have its
DISPLAY environment variable set to use your PMX. You may need to have a
.xsession file in your host home directory to set up and start the X
applications that you wish to use, if the default startup for the host is not
what you want.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.9. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -co TCPIP\X11\RGB.TXTΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxinitΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -co filenameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -logpath directoryΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -nocascadeΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -nocopyrightΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -IΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -iconifyΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -alwaysΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -bsΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -wmΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -fakeBackingStoreΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -shapeΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-always
If a window does not say what backing store support to use for it, a default
value of "notUseful" is used. This flag says to use "always" as the default
value. This flag does not override the backing store settings that are done
by X applications. This flag has no effect if backing store is turned off.
-bs
By default, backing store is turned on. This flag turns it off.
-co filename
Sets the color database file name. The default is TCPIP\X11\RGB.TXT.
-fakeBackingStore
Forces PMX to say it supports backing store, if it is turned off. Some
applications refuse to run unless this indicator is set, even though they
should be able to run without it, according to the X protocol standard.
-iconify
Specifies that the X Window System server window will automatically reduce
to a window-list entry. The X Window System server will also be shown as an
icon in the minimized window folder or on the desktop.
-I
Ignores all remaining arguments.
-logpath directory
Specifies where to put the PMX.LOG log file. If -logpath is not specified,
the directory for PMX.LOG is specified by the ETC environment variable. If
PMX files are stored on a shared read-only disk, this allows the log file to
be placed elsewhere.
-nocascade
Windows that are not initially positioned by user specifications normally
are cascaded down the screen. The -nocascade parameter says to not cascade
if the application provided an initial location.
-nocopyright
Does not display initial copyright window when starting.
-shape
Disables the use of shape extensions. The shape extensions allow
applications to create non-rectangular windows. Shape extensions are
enabled by default. There may be rare circumstances where you will want to
turn off shape extensions to gain some drawing speed.
-wm
If a window does not say what backing store support to use for it, a default
value of "notUseful" is used. This flag says to use "whenMapped" as the
default value. This flag does not override the backing store settings that
are done by X applications. This flag has no effect if backing store is
turned off.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.10. Help Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxinitΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇ -hΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ?ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-h
This option displays XINIT help information.
?
This option displays XINIT help information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.11. Environment Variables Read by XINIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
XINIT reads and take action on several environment variables.
Note: See Setting Environment Variables for more information on setting
environment variables.
LANG XINIT uses this environment variable, if present, to supply
the value for the -lang parameter.
PMXUNIX XINIT uses this environment variable, if present, to supply
the value for the -unix parameter.
PMXKEYBOARD XINIT uses this environment variable, if present, to supply
the value for the -k parameter.
PMXFLAGS XINIT uses this environment variable, if present, to supply
additional XINIT parameters. For example, if you always
wanted to include the -nocascade and -nocopyright parameters
when starting PMX, you would set the parameter like this: SET
PMXFLAGS=-nocascade -nocopyright. XINIT adds the parameters
you specify in this environment variable before the
parameters you specify explicitly with the XINIT command.
XFILES Since this environment variable is crucial to correct PMX
operation, XINIT checks to make sure it is present. XINIT
does not start PMX if this environment variable has not been
set.
DISPLAY Since this environment variable is crucial to correct X
utility operation, XINIT checks to make sure it is present.
XINIT does not start PMX if this environment variable has not
been set.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.12. How XINIT Automatically Sets the Keyboard Mapping File (-k Parameter) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You specify the keyboard mapping file with the -k parameter or the PMXKEYBOARD
environment variable. If you do not specify a keyboard mapping file by using
one of these methods, XINIT supplies this parameter automatically.
XINIT determines the keyboard mapping file from the language code value you
specify for the -lang parameter or in the LANG environment variable. If you
specify a non-US and non-Japanese language code value, then XINIT uses a
102-key keyboard by assuming the -k 102 parameter. If you specify a Japanese
language code value, XINIT uses a Japanese 5576-A01 (106 keys) keyboard by
assuming the -k 106A parameter.
If you do not specify a language code value with the -lang parameter or the
LANG environment variable, XINIT assumes the -lang en_US parameter and uses a
101-keyboard by assuming the -k 101 parameter.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.13. How XINIT Uses PMXWAIT and XMODMAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
After calling PMX, XINIT uses the PMXWAIT utility to wait until PMX has
started. When PMXWAIT returns with a good return code, XINIT runs the XMODMAP
utility, using the keyboard mapping file determined from the -lang and -unix
parameters.
For more information, see Wait Until PMX Is Ready-PMXWAIT and Modify Keyboard
Key Mapping-XMODMAP.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.14. Customizing XINIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If you want XINIT to work differently or perform other functions, you can
customize it by editing the XINIT.CMD file. However, it is preferred at you do
not modify XINIT.CMD because this file may get overwritten if you reinstall
PMX. XINIT.CMD will look for the command file, XINITRC.CMD, and if it is in
the \TCPIP\ETC directory (not the \TCPIP\BIN directory), XINIT.CMD will call
it. Thus, commands can be specified in XINITRC.CMD instead of XINIT.CMD.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. PMX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To start PMX, issue the pmx command:
Note: You can enter the pmx operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéPMX Functions Operands Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéKeyboard -k Γöé
Γöé -r Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéColor -pseudocolor Γöé
Γöé -staticcolor Γöé
Γöé -palettemgr Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéCursor -bwcursor Γöé
Γöé -colorcursor Γöé
Γöé -lc Γöé
Γöé -pmcursor Γöé
Γöé -reversebwcursor Γöé
Γöé -reversecolorcursorΓöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFocus -explicitfocus Γöé
Γöé -implicitfocus Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRaise Window -clickclienttoraiseΓöé
Γöé -clickframetoraise Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFont -fc Γöé
Γöé -fn Γöé
Γöé -fp Γöé
Γöé -logfonts Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBug compatibility bc Γöé
Γöé -bc Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéXDMCP -broadcast Γöé
Γöé -class Γöé
Γöé -cookie Γöé
Γöé -displayID Γöé
Γöé -indirect Γöé
Γöé -port Γöé
Γöé -query Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional Operands -always Γöé
Γöé -bs Γöé
Γöé -co Γöé
Γöé -fakeBackingStore Γöé
Γöé -help Γöé
Γöé -i Γöé
Γöé -iconify Γöé
Γöé -logpath Γöé
Γöé -nocascade Γöé
Γöé -nocopyright Γöé
Γöé -shape Γöé
Γöé -wm Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
Note: Many of the parameters you set on the command line can also be set in
TCPIPCFG. If you set parameters in both places, the command line
parameters will override the TCPIPCFG parameters. See Using the
Configuration Notebook Program to Configure PMX for more information on
TCPIPCFG.
In the case of the font path (-fp pathname), directories are separated by
commas, rather than blanks. For example, to start PMX with both the
miscellaneous and the 75 dot per inch (dpi) font directories, as well as your
own personal fonts directory C:\MYFONTS, specify the following command
parameters:
pmx -fp d:\tcpip\X11\misc,d:\tcpip\X11\75dpi,c:\myfonts
This example assumes that you installed TCP/IP for OS/2 on drive d: in the
TCPIP directory.
For more information about the color database and font files, see Files Used by
PMX. For more information about color tables, see Color Table Support.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1. Keyboard Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -rΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -k nΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇrΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-k n
Sets the keyboard type, where n comes from the following table. Typical
USA keyboards have 101 keys; European languages usually have 102 keys. PMX
handles three types of Japanese keyboards.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéKeyboard Type -k Flag Value Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé101 key 101 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé102 key 102 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéJapanese 5576-A01 5576-A01 or 5576A01 Γöé
Γöé(106 keys) or 106A Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéJapanese 5576-001 5576-001 or 5576001 Γöé
Γöé(124 keys) or 124 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéJapanese 5576-002 5576-002 or 5576002 Γöé
Γöé(106 keys) or 106 Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
r
Turns on automatic repeating of keys on the keyboard. This is the default.
-r
Turns off automatic repeating of keys on the keyboard.
-unix type
Specifies the version of keyboard mapping files that are used. The default
is AIX3.2. Instructions for installing keyboard mapping files from other
Unix vendors can be found inside the XINIT.CMD file itself.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2. Color Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -staticcolorΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇ -pseudocolor nΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇ -palettemgr n ΓöÇΓöÿ
-pseudocolor n
Tells PMX to provide a modifiable color table using a PM Realizable Color
Table. You can specify the -pseudocolor parameter with the abbreviation
-pseudo.
-staticcolor
Tells PMX to provide a StaticColor visual (nonmodifiable color map) for
applications to select. You can specify the -staticcolor parameter using
the abbreviation -static.
-palettemgr n
Tells PMX to provide a modifiable color table using a PM Palette Manager
palette. N is the number of colors that should be used for PMX
applications. N must be in the range of 129-236. You can specify the
-palettemgr parameter with the abbreviation -palette.
If -pseudocolor is specified, applications are told that modifiable color
tables using PM Realizable Color Tables are supported. If the applications
choose to modify or create new color tables, and the Presentation Manager
device really does not support it, an error occurs. If -staticcolor is
specified, the applications are told they can select a non-modifiable color
table, which has colors that are the same as the default physical color table
of the display. If -palettemgr parameter is specified, applications are told
that modifiable color tables using PM Palette Manager are supported. If the
applications choose to modify or create new color tables, and the Presentation
Manager device does not support it, an error occurs.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3. Cursor Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -lcΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -pmcursorΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ -colorcursorΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇ -bwcursorΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γö£ΓöÇ -reversecolorcursorΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇ -reversebwcursorΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-bwcursor
Indicates that PMX should use an X Window System cursor, but with only black
and white instead of colors. This is the default if the PM display device
driver does not support colored cursors.
-colorcursor
Indicates that PMX should use an X Window System colored cursor. This is the
default unless the PM display device driver does not support colored
cursors.
-lc
Doubles the dimensions of any cursor, unless it will become too large to be
a Presentation Manager cursor.
-pmcursor
Indicates that PMX should use the PM arrow as the cursor, not an X Window
System cursor.
-reversebwcursor
Indicates that PMX should use an X Window System cursor, but with only black
and white instead of colors. Black and white will be reversed from the
normal colors. For example, the normal X Window System cursor will be black
on the outside and white in the middle.
-reversecolorcursor
Indicates that PMX should use an X Window System colored cursor. The
foreground and background colors will be reversed from the normal colors.
For example, the normal X Window System cursor will be black on the outside,
and white in the middle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4. Focus Operand ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -explicitfocusΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -implicitfocusΓöÇΓöÿ
-explicitfocus
Tells the server to transfer focus from one client window to another only by
clicking in the window. This is the normal behavior for Presentation
Manager windows and is the default behavior for the server. This option
turns off any previous -implicitfocus option on the pmx command line.
-implicitfocus
Tells the server to transfer focus from one client window to another simply
by moving the pointer into the client area of the window. It is not
necessary to click on a client window to transfer focus to it (provided some
PMX client window already has focus). This is not the normal behavior for
Presentation Manager windows. This option turns off any previous
-explicitfocus option on the pmx command line.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5. Raise Window Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -clickclienttoraiseΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -clickframetoraiseΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-clickclienttoraise
Tells the server to raise windows to the top when clicks are done in the
application (client) area, which is the usual Presentation Manager behavior.
(Clicks in the PM frame also can raise the window.) This option turns off
any previous -clickframetoraise option on the pmx command line. This option
is the default.
-clickframetoraise
Tells the server to raise windows to the top only when clicks are done on
the PM frame. Clicking on the application (client) area will not raise the
window. This option turns off any previous -clickclienttoraise option on
the pmx command line.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6. Font Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -fc cursorΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -fc fontnameΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ -fn fixedΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -fn fontnameΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ -fp TCPIP\X11\MISC,TCPIP\X11\75DPI,TCPIP\X11\SPEEDOΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇ
Γöé ΓöîΓöÇ,ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ Γöé
Γöé Γöé Γöé
ΓööΓöÇ -fp ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇpathnameΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γöö -logfontsΓöÇΓöÿ
-fc fontname
Sets the cursor font. The default is cursor.
-fn fontname
Sets default font. The default is fixed.
-fp pathname
Sets the default font path. The default is TCPIP\X11\MISC,TCPIP\X11\75DPI,
-logfonts
Causes PMX to log font requests. This is useful if an X application is
reporting failures to find fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.7. Bug Compatibilty ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -bcΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇpmxΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ bcΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
The need for this option is determined by the following circumstances: Some
clients, previous to release 4, pass illegal values in some protocol requests
and some servers, previous to release 4 also, do not correctly generate errors
in these cases. Such clients, when run with a release 4 server, will terminate
abnormally or otherwise fail to operate correctly. Bug compatibility mode
explicitly reintroduces certain bugs into the X Window System server, so that
many such clients can still be run.
Note: This mode should be used with caution. The server must support the
MIT-SUNDRY-NONSTANDARD protocol extension in order for this option to work. New
application development should be done with this mode disabled.
bc
Enables bug compatibility in the server.
-bc
Disables bug compatibility in the server.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.8. XDMCP Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -broadcastΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -class display_classΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -cookie authorization_bitsΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -displayID display_idΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -indirect hostnameΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -port port_numberΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -query hostnameΓöÇΓöÿ
-broadcast
Enables broadcasting of BroadcastQuery packets to the network. The first
responding display manager will be chosen for the session with your PMX.
-class display_class
Specifies an additional display qualifier used in resource lookup for
display-specific options. (This option is untested.)
-cookie authorization_bits
When testing XDM-AUTHENTICATION-1, a private key is shared between the
server and the manager. This option sets the value of that private data.
(This option is untested.)
-displayID display_id
Specifies the manufacturer display ID for the current display. This allows
the display manager to identify each display so that it can locate the
shared key. (This option is untested.)
-indirect hostname
Enables XDMCP and sends IndirectQuery packets to the specified host. This
option asks the host display manager to start sessions between your PMX and
other hosts.
-port port_number
Use an alternate UDP port number for XDMCP packets. (This option is
untested.)
-query hostname
Enable XDMCP and send Query packets to the specified host display manager to
start a session with your PMX.
Note: Normally XDMCP is enabled by using either -query, -indirect, or
-broadcast. The X Display Manager (usually xdm) must be running on the host
machine. The system administrator for that machine also should have it set up
so that an X session to your machine is possible. For example, at minimum, you
will be presented with a LOGIN window from a session manager, if it can contact
your PMX. Your PMX host access list should include the host that your PMX will
have the session with. The host user ID that you use to log in should have its
DISPLAY environment variable set to use your PMX. You may need to have a
.xsession file in your host home directory to set up and start the X
applications that you wish to use, if the default startup for the host is not
what you want.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.9. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -co TCPIP\X11\RGB.TXTΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -co filenameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -logpath directoryΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -nocascadeΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -nocopyrightΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -IΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -iconifyΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -alwaysΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -bsΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -wmΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -fakeBackingStoreΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -shapeΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -helpΓöÇΓöÿ
-always
If a window does not say what backing store support to use for it, a default
value of "notUseful" is used. This flag says to use "always" as the default
value. This flag does not override the backing store settings that are done
by X applications. This flag has no effect if backing store is turned off.
-bs
By default, backing store is turned on. This flag turns it off.
-co filename
Sets the color database file name. The default is TCPIP\X11\RGB.TXT.
-fakeBackingStore
Forces PMX to say it supports backing store, if it is turned off. Some
applications refuse to run unless this indicator is set, even though they
should be able to run without it, according to the X protocol standard.
-iconify
Specifies that the X Window System server window will automatically reduce
to a window-list entry. The X Window System server will also be shown as an
icon in the minimized window folder or on the desktop.
-I
Ignores all remaining arguments.
-logpath directory
Specifies where to put the PMX.LOG log file. If -logpath is not specified,
the directory for PMX.LOG is specified by the ETC environment variable. If
PMX files are stored on a shared read-only disk, this allows the log file to
be placed elsewhere.
-nocascade
Windows that are not initially positioned by user specifications normally
are cascaded down the screen. The -nocascade parameter says to not cascade
if the application provided an initial location.
-nocopyright
Does not display initial copyright window when starting.
-shape
Disables the use of shape extensions. The shape extensions allow
applications to create non-rectangular windows. Shape extensions are
enabled by default. There may be rare circumstances where you will want to
turn off shape extensions to gain some drawing speed.
-wm
If a window does not say what backing store support to use for it, a default
value of "notUseful" is used. This flag says to use "whenMapped" as the
default value. This flag does not override the backing store settings that
are done by X applications. This flag has no effect if backing store is
turned off.
-help
This option displays PMX help information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. Mouse Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Three-button mouse support changed from OS/2 2.0 to 2.1. OS/2 2.1 now has
button 3 in the middle. That is, buttons 2 and 3 are reversed from previous
versions of OS/2. PMX undoes this change from OS/2 2.1 to match the
expectations of X users who use 3 button mice on other operating systems.
Remember that the button order also can be changed using the XSET utility.
OS/2 may not support all three-button mice. If not, it will usually support
the mouse as a two-button mouse. PMX supports the third button only if OS/2
supports it. You can use the XEV utility to verify that all three buttons
work. Alternatively, you can look at the \TCPIP\ETC\PMX.LOG file to verify
this. Look for the line beginning with "SV_CMOUSEBUTTONS 2" or
"SV_CMOUSEBUTTONS 3", which indicates the number of buttons supported by the
mouse driver.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4. X Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
AIXterm for AIX 3.2 may not support certain character applications. An example
is a program that can be run in the AIXterm window that uses box characters.
The box characters may not display correctly. Some non-USA characters may have
similar problems. This is documented in the AIX file /usr/lpp/X11/README. To
fix the problem you may need to set the AIX environment variable TERM to
aixterm-old.
InfoExplorer searches for font directories organized the way they are on AIX.
When it does not find them, it issues error messages, and then proceeds to find
the fonts it needs in the PMX font directories. This behavior is normal for
InfoExplorer, and would be seen for any X server except those that run on AIX
or on IBM X stations.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5. Using Font Servers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX can access one or more font servers. Any place where a directory can be
specified in a font path, you can specify a font server as well. The font
server specification has the form:
tcp/<hostname>:<port number>
where port number is 7000 by default, and must be 7500 for AIX. For example:
pmx -fp \tcpip\x11\misc,\tcpip\x11\75dpi,tcp/myaixhost:7500
Note: You may need to start the font server on your host system. On some
systems, the font server is not started automatically.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5.1. Font Server Utilities Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PMX supplies three font server utilities:
o fsinfo displays font server information.
o fslsfnts lists available fonts.
o fstobdf downloads a font.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5.1.1. FSINFO Utility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The fsinfo command executes a utility for displaying information about an X
font server. Use this command to examine the:
o Capabilities of a particular server
o Predefined values for various parameters used in client/server communications
o Font catalogs and availability of alternate servers
Syntax
ΓöÇΓöÇfsinfoΓöÇΓöÇ -server server_nameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
-server server_name
Specifies a particular font server. The server_name usually has the format
transport/host:port.
The default port number for most font servers (X11R5) is 7000. AIX font
servers use port number 7500 as the default.
Note: If you do not specify server_name, then you must connect to the
default font server by defining the FONTSERVER environment variable.
An example of the fsinfo command is:
fsinfo -server tcp/aixhost:7500
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5.1.2. FSLSFNTS Utility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The fslsfnts command lists the fonts from a font server that match a given
pattern.
Note: The wildcard character "*" may be used to match any sequence of
characters (including none), and "?" may be used to match any single character.
If no pattern is specified, "*" is assumed. You may need to enclose the "*" and
"?" wildcard characters in double quotes to prevent them from being expanded by
the shell.
Syntax
ΓöÇΓöÇfslsfntsΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -1ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -CΓöÇΓöÿ Γö£ΓöÇ -lΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ ΓööΓöÇ -mΓöÇΓöÿ
Γö£ΓöÇ -llΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇ -lllΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -n columnsΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -server server_nameΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -uΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ 79ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇ -fn patternΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -w widthΓöÇΓöÿ
-1 Specifies that listings should use a single column.
This is the same as -n 1.
-C Specifies that listings should use multiple columns.
This is the same as -n 0.
-l Specifies that medium-length listings should be generated for each font.
-ll Specifies that long listings should be generated for each font.
-lll Specifies that very long listings should be generated for each font.
-m Specifies that long listings (-ll) should also print the minimum and
maximum bounds of each font.
-n columns Specifies the number of columns to use in displaying the output. If
you don't specify the number of columns, the utility will fit the maximum
number of columns into the space specified by the -w width.
-server server_name Specifies a particular font server. The server_name usually
has the format transport/host:port.
The default port number for most font servers (X11R5) is 7000. AIX font
servers use port number 7500 as the default.
Note: If you do not specify server_name, then you must connect to the
default font server by defining the FONTSERVER environment variable.
-u Specifies that the output should be left unsorted.
-w width Specifies the width (in characters) of the output.
The default is 79.
-fn pattern Lists only those fonts matching the given pattern.
An example of the fslsfnts command is:
fslsfnts -server tcp/aixhost:7500
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5.1.3. FSTOBDF Utility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The fstobdf command converts a font server font to .bdf format. This command is
useful for testing servers, debugging font metrics, and reproducing lost BDF
files.
By default, output is written to stdout and displayed on your screen. If you
wish to save the output, redirect stdout to a file. Include the .bdf filename
extension.
Once you have converted the font server font to BDF format, compile it using
either:
o The BDFTOPM command to create an .xfn PMX Private PM font format
o The BDFTOPCF command to create a .pcf font format
After converting to either .xfn or .pcf format, issue the MKFONTDR command in
the directory containing the compiled font. Be sure to specify that directory
in the PMX font path.
Syntax
ΓöÇΓöÇfstobdfΓöÇΓöÇ -fn fontnameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ -server server_nameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
-fn fontname
Specifies the font for which a BDF file should be generated.
-server server_name
Specifies a particular font server. The server_name usually has the format
transport/host:port.
The default port number for most font servers (X11R5) is 7000. AIX font
servers use port number 7500 as the default.
Note: If you do not specify server_name, then you must connect to the
default font server by defining the FONTSERVER environment variable.
An example of the fstobdf command is:
fstobdf -fn fixed -server tcp/aixhost:7500 >fsfixed.bdf
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6. What To Do If Fonts Are Missing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Sometimes an X application attempts to use a font that is not available to the
PMX server. Also sometimes an application may use a font that is inappropriate
or incorrect. After determining what font is missing or incorrect, the user can
do a variety of things to fix the problem.
Some applications use fonts that are not the standard fonts that come with the
X server from the X Consortium. The missing font may be part of a toolkit that
was used to develop the application, or the font may have been developed
especially for the application. It may be that the application specifies a 100
dot per inch font which is among the standard fonts, but PMX only supplies the
75 dot per inch fonts.
Some font error messages from applications do not supply enough information to
solve the problem. Often the actual request is not reported in the error
message, making it difficult to diagnose why the font request fails. PMX has a
-logfonts command line option to trace the font requests made by applications.
There is also a configuration notebook entry for this, on the Fonts page. If
this option is used, the PMX.LOG file will record font requests, and an error
message if the request could not be satisfied.
The request can be used with the XLSFONTS utility to determine what fonts match
the request. The fonts are listed in the order in which they are found on the
font path.
The following options are available to the user that has a missing font. Some
of the options may not work with some applications.
o The user can substitute another font, by modifying application resources or
application command line options. Sometimes this option is not possible.
o The user can substitute another font, by finding a sufficiently similar font
to what is being requested, and modify the FONTS.ALI file where that font is
located, so that the font request will select the substitute font. Sometimes
there is no similar font.
o The user can obtain a copy of the font from another system, and port it into
the user's machine. The font should either be a BDF font, so it can be
compiled, or it should be a PCF font.
o The user can start a font server on a machine where the font exists, and
include that font server in the PMX font path. The font server must also be
able to access the font, of course. The host may not have a font server.
o The user can contact the application developer to obtain a copy of the font
that can be put on the user's machine.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.7. XDMCP Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
XDMCP is a protocol between X servers and X session managers. It allows a
server to contact a session manager on another machine, when the server is
started. The session manager can then start X applications for the user
automatically.
XDMCP, the X display management protocol, is now implemented in PMX, although
it has not been thoroughly tested. We will be making further changes in this
area, and adding documentation for this feature of X, in a future version.
Related Topic:
XDMCP parameters
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.8. Resetting the Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Resetting the server is now supported, both by the standard X protocol
functions, and by a menu item. This causes all X applications to be closed,
without shutting down the server.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.9. Tips on Saving Space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If you had installed TCP/IP 2.0 over the previous product (in the same
directory), and PMX from the previous product had also been installed, the
fonts from the previous product can be deleted to save approximately 5 MB of
space. Do an equivalent of the following:
cd \tcpip\x11\misc
erase *.snf
cd \tcpip\x11\75dpi
erase *.snf
You can save approximately 3 MB of space by deleting the Japanese and Korean
fonts. To delete the Japanese fonts jiskan16.pcf, jiskan24.pcf, and k14.pcf,
do the following:
cd \tcpip\x11\misc
erase jiskan*.pcf
erase k14.pcf
mkfontdr
To delete the Korean fonts hanglg16.pcf, hanglm16.pcf, and hanglm24.pcf, do the
following:
cd \tcpip\x11\misc
erase hangl*.pcf
mkfontdr
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Using X Window System Utilities ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
X Window System utilities are included with PMX to help administer and
customize PMX. The clients are based on the MIT Consortium X11R5 distribution
and are intended for use with PMX only.
To function correctly, the X Windows System utilities need the DISPLAY
environment variable to set on your workstation.
The following utilities are provided:
o FSINFO
o FSLSFNTS
o FSTOBDF
o PMXWAIT
o REXEC
o XEV
o XFD
o XHOST
o XLSFONTS
o XMODMAP
o XPROP
o XSCOPE
o XSET
o XSTDCMAP
o XWININFO
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. Running X Window System Utilities on Other Workstations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The X Window System utilities are available on other workstations. For example,
if your workstation is called snark on the network, you can execute the
XLSFONTS utility on any workstation to display the fonts available on PMX.
xlsfonts -display snark:0
The list is sent to standard output on the system on which you run XLSFONTS.
You can direct the output to the PG or MORE filters, depending upon which
system you run.
To add a directory to a font path, run the XSET utility. If you have created
fonts and have placed them in a directory called \MYSTUFF\MYFONTS, enter the
following statement to add that font directory to the font path temporarily
until PMX is stopped:
xset -display snark:0 +fp \mystuff\myfonts
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. Redirecting Output Using OS/2 Command Operators and Filters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Many of the X Window System utilities display information at an OS/2 prompt (by
writing to OS/2's standard output). The information may scroll too quickly for
you to read it; or, you might want to capture the information for later use.
The following list explains how to use some of the OS/2 command operators and
filters with X Window System utilities:
> Redirects output to a file or device.
For example, to store in a file the information produced by the
XLSFONTS command, enter:
xlsfonts > fontinfo.txt
where fontinfo.txt is the name of the file to receive the
information.
You could also redirect the output to a printer. For example:
xlsfonts > lpt1
would redirect the output to a printer attached to LPT1.
>> Appends redirected output to an existing file. This command operator
is the same as > (shown above), except that it adds information to a
file rather than replacing it.
|more When the output fills the window or screen, OS/2 waits for you to
press a key before displaying more information. For example, type
xlsfonts | more
to look at the output of xlsfonts one screen at a time.
The command operators and filters just described appear in the examples given
for the programs in this chapter and in Customizing PMX Fonts.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. Wait Until PMX Is Ready-PMXWAIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The PMXWAIT utility tests whether PMX becomes ready to accept client
connections within a specified time period.
To run PMXWAIT, issue the pmxwait command:
ΓöîΓöÇ ΓöÇquietΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ ΓöîΓöÇ30ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxwaitΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ ΓöÇverboseΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇsecondsΓöÇΓöÿ
Displaying pmxwait help
ΓöÇΓöÇpmxwaitΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ?ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
-verbose Specifies that a message prints on the standard output device
indicating whether the server was ready. If a wait is necessary, a
message is also printed. You can specify the verbose parameter with
the abbreviation -v.
-quiet Specifies that no messages are printed. -quiet is the default. You
can specify the quiet parameter with the abbreviation -q.
seconds Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the server to become
ready to accept client connections. If seconds is not specified, the
default number of 30 seconds is used. The maximum time period is
180.
? Prints the pmxwait command syntax on a standard output device. Any
other parameters are ignored.
If PMX is ready to accept client connections within the time interval
specified, a return code of zero is returned. If PMX is not ready, a return
code greater than zero is returned.
Use the PMXWAIT utility in the TCPSTART.CMD file or in any command file used to
start PMX. In the following example, the STARTUP.CMD file contains a CALL
command to start TCP/IP for OS/2.
CALL C:\TCPIP\BIN\TCPSTART.CMD
To start X Window System client applications on another workstation to connect
with your PMX, you can change the STARTUP.CMD file as follows:
CALL C:\TCPIP\BIN\TCPSTART.CMD
C:\TCPIP\BIN\PMXWAIT 45
IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO OUCH
REXEC myaix -l myid -p mypassword aixterm -fn 8x16 -display myos2:0
REXEC myaix -l myid -p mypassword xclock -analog -display myos2:0
EXIT
:OUCH
ECHO PMX did not start!
The REXEC entry must contain the -p password parameter. If you omit the
parameter, you are prompted for the password, if one exists. A security
problem can arise if the STARTUP.CMD file is read by other users.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4. Issue a Command on a Remote Host-REXEC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The REXEC command issues a command on a remote host. The REXEC command sends a
single command to the remote host.
To run REXEC, issue the rexec command:
ΓöÇΓöÇrexecΓöÇΓöÇhostΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -l loginnameΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -p passwordΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇcommandΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ ΓöÇbΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ ΓöÇiΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -kΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -nΓöÇΓöÿ
Displaying rexec Help
ΓöÇΓöÇrexecΓöÇΓöÇ ΓöÇ?ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
host Specifies the remote host on which the command is to be issued.
-b Uses binary mode for the data transferred to and from the remote
host.
-i Uses interactive mode for input. REXEC reads directly from the
keyboard instead of stdin.
-l loginname Specifies the user ID on host. If you do not specify a login
name, the values in the NETRC file are used.
-p password Specifies the password that is associated with the login name. If
you do not specify a password, the values in the NETRC file are used.
If the NETRC file does not provide the password value, REXEC prompts
you for the password. You can enter the password in a non-echo mode.
-k Ignores the local keyboard input. This is helpful for running
non-interactive input, especially from a batch file.
-n Specifies not to use the NETRC file for automatic login.
command Specifies the command to be issued on the remote host. The command
must be in the syntax used by the remote host.
-? Displays help information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5. Display Event Information-XEV ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The XEV utility creates a test window that you can use to see how PMX reacts to
user input. To run XEV, issue the xev command:
Note: You can enter the xev operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéXEV Functions Operands Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAttributes -bs Γöé
Γöé -bw Γöé
Γöé -geometry Γöé
Γöé -rv Γöé
Γöé -s Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional -display Γöé
ΓöéFunctions -id Γöé
Γöé -name Γöé
Γöé -? Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
XEV creates a window, and requests PMX to send and display the event whenever
action takes place such as movement, resizing, or text entry. This window can
be attached to an existing window, which helps you to see what causes events to
occur. The event is sent to a standard output file or device.
To determine what key code is generated by pressing a particular key, do the
following steps:
1. Open an OS/2 window and run XEV. XEV creates its own window for you to
use.
2. Click the X cursor in the XEV window. The OS/2 window reflects the events
(such as your mouse movements) in the XEV window.
3. Press and release the key you want to know about. The press and release
action appears in the OS/2 window as two events.
The events contain information about the key code and key synonyms associated
with the key you pressed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.1. Attribute Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxevΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γöé ΓöîΓöÇnotusefulΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ Γöé
ΓööΓöÇ -bsΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇwhenmappedΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇalwaysΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -bw pixelsΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -geometry geomΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -rvΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -sΓöÇΓöÿ
-bs notuseful, -bs whenmapped, -bs always
Specifies the type of backing store to give the window. The default is
notuseful.
-bw pixels
Specifies the border width for the window in pixels.
-geometry geom
Specifies the window size, window location, or both.
-rv
Specifies the window is displayed in reverse video.
-s
Specifies that save-under should be enabled on the window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5.2. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxevΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -id windowidΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -display ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ:serverΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇhostΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ.screenΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -name stringΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -?ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-display host:server.screen
Specifies the display, server, and screen to connect to. host is the host
name of the physical display, server specifies the server number, and screen
specifies the screen number. For example:
-display your_node:0.1
This specifies screen 1 of server 0 on the display named by your_node.
Either, or both, the host name and screen can be omitted. If the host name
is omitted, the local display is assumed. If the screen is omitted, screen 0
is assumed, and the period is not needed.
-id windowid
Specifies that the window ID should be monitored, rather than creating a new
window.
-name string
Specifies the name to assign to the created window.
-?
Displays a list of the parameters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6. Display a Font-XFD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The XFD utility creates a window in which the characters of a font are
displayed.
ΓöÇΓöÇxfdΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ Operands Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇ ΓöÇfn fontnameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Note: The XFD utility is still the X11 R4 version.
To run XFD, issue the xfd command.
Note: You can enter the xfd operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéXFD Functions Operands Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéColor -bd Γöé
Γöé -bg Γöé
Γöé -fg Γöé
Γöé -fw Γöé
Γöé -gray Γöé
Γöé -rv Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFont -bf Γöé
Γöé -verbose Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéIcon -icon Γöé
Γöé -in Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéGeometry -bw Γöé
Γöé -geometry Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional -? Γöé
ΓöéFunctions -display Γöé
Γöé -start Γöé
Γöé -display Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.1. Color Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇ -bg whiteΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxfdΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -bd colorΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -bg colorΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ -fg blackΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -fg colorΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -fwΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -grayΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -rvΓöÇΓöÿ
-bd color
Specifies foreground color. The default is black.
-bg color
Specifies the background color. The default is white.
-fg color
Specifies foreground color. The default is black.
-fw
Overrides a previous choice to display a window in reverse video.
-gray
Specifies that the foreground and background colors are displayed on a gray
background.
-rv
Switches the foreground and background colors.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.2. Font Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxfdΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -bf fontnameΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -verboseΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇ -fn fontnameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
-bf fontname
Specifies the font for messages at the bottom of the window.
-fn fontname
Specifies the file name where the font exists.
-verbose
Specifies that extra font information be displayed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.3. Icon Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxfdΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -icon filenameΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -in iconnameΓöÇΓöÿ
-icon filename
Specifies that the bit map in the named file is used as the icon.
-in iconname
Specifies the title to display below the icon.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.4. Geometry Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxfdΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -bw nΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -geometry geometryΓöÇΓöÿ
-bw n
Specifies the window border width in pixels.
-geometry geometry
Specifies an initial window location and size.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.5. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxfdΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -displayΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼:serverΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇhostΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ.screenΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -?ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -start charnumΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -tl titleΓöÇΓöÿ
-?
Displays a list of the parameters.
-display host:server.screen
Specifies the display, server, and screen to connect to. host is the host
name of the physical display, server specifies the server number, and screen
specifies the screen number. For example:
-display your_node:0.1
This specifies screen 1 of server 0 on the display named by your_node.
Either, or both, the host name and screen can be omitted. If the host name
is omitted, the local display is assumed. If the screen is omitted, screen 0
is assumed, and the period is not needed.
-start charnum
Specifies the number of the character that is the first character displayed.
-tl title
Specifies the window title. If the title has blanks or special characters,
enclose the title within double quotation marks (" ").
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6.6. XFD Character Display ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The XFD utility displays the characters of the font named fontname. The
characters are shown in increasing order from left to right, and from top to
bottom. The first character displayed at the top left is the character number
0. However, when the -start parameter is supplied, the character number of the
-start parameter is used. The characters are displayed in a grid of boxes.
When the -gray parameter is supplied, the characters are displayed using the
XDrawImageString function. XDrawImageString uses the foreground and background
colors on a gray background. This allows you to determine exactly how
XDrawImageString draws any given character. When -gray is not supplied, the
characters are drawn using the foreground color on the background color.
All of the characters in the font might not fit in the window. Clicking mouse
button 2 on the window displays the next window of characters. Clicking mouse
button 1 on the window displays the previous window of characters. XFD warns
you with a bell tone if you attempt to go back before the 0 character.
Clicking the middle button (or clicking buttons 1 and 2 simultaneously, with a
two-button mouse) on a character displays the character's number in both
decimal and hexadecimal at the bottom of the window. When you select verbose
mode, additional information about particular characters appears. This
information includes its width, left bearing, right bearing, ascent, and
descent. When you select verbose mode, typing either < or > in the window
displays the minimum or maximum values of these fields over the entire font.
Note: If the font is an 8-bit font, the characters 256-511 (0X'100' -0X'1FF')
or 512-767 (0X'200'-0X'2FF') display exactly the same as the characters 0-225
(0X'00'-0X'FF'). XFD, by default, creates a window of sufficient size to
display the first 256 characters, using a 16-by-16 grid.
The font name is interpreted by PMX. Use the XLSFONTS utility to obtain a list
of all the fonts available. When a font name is not listed on the command
line, the XFD displays the PMX default font.
The window remains open until the XFD process is ended.
You can close the window before processing is complete in either of two ways:
o Type q
o Press Ctrl+C
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.7. Authorize Client Hosts-XHOST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the XHOST utility to dynamically add and delete hosts from the list of
hosts authorized to connect to PMX. This utility, along with the X0HOSTS file,
provides security.
PMX allows network connections from programs running on the same workstation or
from workstations listed in the X0HOSTS file. The XHOST utility runs from a
startup file or runs interactively to allow access to other users.
To run the XHOST utility, issue the xhost command:
Note: You can enter the xhost operands in any order.
ΓöÇΓöÇxhostΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇhostnameΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ΓööΓöÇ + ΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇ ΓöÇ ΓöÇΓöÇhostnameΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γö£ΓöÇ + ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇ ΓöÇ ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
+ hostname Adds the specified host name to the list of hosts that are allowed
to connect to the X Window System server.
- hostname Removes the specified host name from the list of hosts that are
allowed to connect to the X Window System server. Existing connections are
not broken, but new connection attempts are denied.
+ Grants access to all hosts, even if they are not on the list of allowed
hosts. Access control is turned off.
- Restricts access to only those hosts on the list of allowed hosts. Access
control is turned on.
When command parameters are not given, the list of hosts authorized to connect
is printed on a standard output device. A message indicating whether access
control is currently enabled is also printed. This is the only option used by
workstations that are not running PMX.
Use the DISPLAY environment variable to determine which X Window System server
is running and to query for a list of hosts authorized to access it. Changes
in access that XHOST makes are not permanent; they are not recorded in the
X0HOSTS file. The access changes are lost when PMX stops.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8. Display Font Information-XLSFONTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The XLSFONTS utility lists information about fonts used on PMX.
To run the XLSFONTS utility, issue the xlsfonts command:
Note: You can enter the xlsfonts operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéXLSFONTS Operands Γöé
ΓöéFunctions Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéColumns -1 Γöé
Γöé -C Γöé
Γöé -n Γöé
Γöé -w Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFont Listing -fn Γöé
Γöé -l Γöé
Γöé -ll Γöé
Γöé -lll Γöé
Γöé -m Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional -display Γöé
ΓöéOperands -n Γöé
Γöé -o Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
The output of XLSFONTS is sent to a standard output file or device. You can
redirect the output for easier viewing, as shown in the following example:
xlsfonts -display snark:0 -fn *courier* | more
This example displays information about fonts with the character string courier
in their font name. The | more redirects the output to the MORE filter so that
OS/2 waits for you to press a key before displaying each screen of information.
For more information, see Redirecting Output Using OS/2 Command Operators and
Filters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8.1. Column Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxlsfontsΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -1ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -CΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ -w 79ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -n columnsΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -w widthΓöÇΓöÿ
-1
Indicates that listings should use a single column.
-C
Indicates that listings should use multiple columns. This produces the same
output as -n 0.
-n columns
Specifies the number of columns to use in displaying the output. By default,
it will attempt to fit as many columns of font names as possible into the
number of characters you specify with -w width.
-w width
Specifies the width, in characters, that should be used to determine the
number of columns to print.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8.2. Font Listing Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxlsfontsΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -fn patternΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -lΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -mΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇlΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇlΓöÇΓöÿ
-fn pattern
Indicates that only fonts matching the pattern you specify are listed.
-l
Indicates that medium, long, and very long listings should be generated for
each font. For example, -l generates medium listing, -ll generates long
listings, and -lll generates very long listings.
Note: Using the -l parameter can tie up the PMX server for an indefinite
amount of time.
-m
Indicates that long listings should also print the minimum and maximum
bounds of each font.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8.3. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxlsfontsΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇdisplayΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ:serverΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇhostΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇscreenΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -oΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -uΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-display host:server.screen
Specifies the display, server, and screen to connect to. host is the host
name of the physical display, server specifies the server number, and screen
specifies the screen number. For example:
-display your_node:0.1
This specifies screen 1 of server 0 on the display named by your_node.
Either, or both, the host name and screen can be omitted. If the host name
is omitted, the local display is assumed. If the screen is omitted, screen 0
is assumed and the period is not needed.
-o
Specifies that XLSFONTS should do an OpenFont (and QueryFont if appropriate)
rather than a ListFonts. This is useful if ListFonts or ListFontsWithInfo
fails to list a known font (as is the case with some scaled font systems).
-u
Specifies that the output should be left unsorted.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.9. Modify Keyboard Key Mapping-XMODMAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The XMODMAP utility displays or changes the X Window System keyboard modifier
map and the table of key synonyms on a specified display and host. It runs
from your X Window System STARTUP.CMD file to set up the keyboard. If you do
not specify any parameters, the xmodmap command displays the current map.
A table of key synonyms maps physical keys (keycodes) to logical keys
(keysyms). Because X Window System client applications normally use key
synonyms, the physical locations of keys do not have to be defined to the
application. Key synonyms represent the graphics printed on top of the keys.
You can change the physical key used for any logical key. The modifier map
designates the key synonyms used for Shift, Ctrl, Alt, and similar modifier
keys. Specify the key synonyms used for modifier functions.
To run the XMODMAP utility, issue the xmodmap command:
ΓöÇΓöÇxmodmapΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ Operands Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇfilenameΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ ΓöÇ ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
Note: You can enter the xmodmap operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéXMODMAP Functions Operands Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMessages -e Γöé
Γöé -grammar Γöé
Γöé -quiet Γöé
Γöé -verbose Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéOutput File -pk Γöé
Γöé -pke Γöé
Γöé -pm Γöé
Γöé -pp Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional Functions -display Γöé
Γöé -help Γöé
Γöé -n Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.9.1. Message Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
Γöé
ΓöÇΓöÇxmodmapΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼Γö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -e "expression"ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -grammarΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -quietΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -verboseΓöÇΓöÿ
-e expression
Indicates an expression to be issued. Any number of expressions can be
specified from the command line. The expressions specify changes to the key
map table and the modifier map. Note that an expression must be quoted if it
is on the command line, but it is not quoted if it is in a file of
expressions.
-grammar
Prints a help message describing the expression grammar on the standard
error output. This includes -e expressions.
-quiet
Turns off verbose logging. This is the default.
-verbose
Prints logging information while XMODMAP parses its input.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.9.2. Output File Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxmodmapΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -pkΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -pkeΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -pmΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -ppΓöÇΓöÿ
-pk
Sends the current key map table to the standard output file.
-pke
Sends the current key map table, in the form of XMODMAP expressions, to the
standard output file.
-pm
Sends the current modifier map to the standard output file.
-pp
Sends the current pointer (mouse button) map to the standard output file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.9.3. Input File Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxmodmapΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇfilenameΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ - ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-
Specifies that XMODMAP use the standard input as the input file.
- filename
Specifies a file containing XMODMAP expressions to be issued.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.9.4. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇxmodmapΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -displayΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ:serverΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇhostΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ.screenΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -helpΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -nΓöÇΓöÿ
-display host:server.screen
Specifies the display, server, and screen to connect to. host is the host
name of the physical display, server specifies the server number, and screen
specifies the screen number. For example:
-display your_node:0.1
This specifies screen 1 of server 0 on the display named by your_node.
Either, or both, the host name and screen can be omitted. If the host name
is omitted, the local display is assumed. If the screen is omitted, screen 0
is assumed, and the period is not needed.
-help
Prints an explanation of the command line parameters on the standard error
output.
-n
Indicates that XMODMAP will not change the mappings. It displays what would
happen if the mappings were changed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.9.5. Formats of Expressions in XMODMAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Expressions are commands to change the key map table and the modifier map.
Expressions can be given to XMODMAP by -e command line parameters and by
providing a file containing expressions. The XMODMAP program reads a list of
expressions from the input file and from the command line.
XMODMAP converts the expressions to appropriate calls for the XLIB routines:
o XChangeKeyboardMapping()
o XInsertModifiermapEntry()
o XDeleteModifiermapEntry()
The expressions for XMODMAP follow:
Expression Description
keycode number = keysym1 keysym2[. . .]
One or more key synonyms are assigned to the key code
designated by the number. The number can be decimal,
hexadecimal, or octal in the C-language format. Usually
only one key synonym is assigned to a key code. You can
determine the key codes of keys on your keyboard by running
the XEV event utility and pressing the keys you want to
identify. XEV displays information about the keys pressed.
keysym keysymname = keysymname
Identifies the current key code of the key synonym named to
the left of the =. The key synonym named on the right is
assigned to the key designated by the key code. When the
same key synonym is associated with more than one key, this
procedure might not work.
clear modifiername
Removes all key synonym entries in the modifier map for a
given modifier. The valid names are: Shift, Lock,
Control, Mod1, Mod2, Mod3, Mod4, and Mod5. Case does not
matter in modifier names, although it does matter for all
other names. For example, clear Lock removes any key
synonyms bound to the lock modifier.
add modifiername = keysymname
Adds the given synonyms to the indicated modifier map. Key
synonym names are evaluated after all of the input
expressions are read, making it easier to write expressions
to swap key assignments.
remove modifiername = keysymname
Removes the designated key synonyms from the modifier map.
Removed expression key synonym names are evaluated as the
line is read in, not after all input expressions are read.
You can remove key synonyms from a modifier without knowing
if they were reassigned.
pointer = default
Sets the pointer (mouse button) map back to its default
settings. Mouse button 1 generates a code of 1, mouse
button 2 generates a code of 2, and so on.
pointer = n1 n2 n3 [. . .]
Sets the pointer map to contain the indicated button codes.
The list always starts with the first physical button. The
numbers (n1 through n3) in the list specify which button
codes are delivered to applications for which physical
buttons.
To change the binding of a modifier key, remove it from the modifier map.
XMODMAP does not automatically generate, add, or remove expressions when a key
code is already bound to a modifier. You must provide these expressions.
Many pointers (usually mouse pointers) are designed such that the first
physical button is pressed using the index finger of the right hand. People
who are left-handed frequently find that it is more comfortable to reverse the
button codes generated, so that the primary button is pressed using the index
finger of the left hand.
The following examples show how to use the XMODMAP utility to modify your
keyboard and mouse buttons:
o To change mouse buttons from right-handed to left-handed orientation:
xmodmap -e "pointer = 3 2 1"
o To change a Backspace key to a Delete key:
xmodmap -e "keysym BackSpace = Delete"
o To make the left Alt key be a Meta key:
xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L"
o Example xmodmap expressions file to reverse the positions of the left Ctrl
key and the Caps Lock key:
!
! Swap Caps_Lock and Control_L
!
remove Lock = Caps_Lock
remove Control = Control_L
keysym Control_L = Caps_Lock
keysym Caps_Lock = Control_L
add Lock = Caps_Lock
add Control = Control_L
In the expressions file, a line beginning with an exclamation mark (!) is a
comment.
The following example is more complex:
!
! On the HP, the following keycodes have key caps as listed:
!
! 101 Backspace
! 55 Caps
! 14 Ctrl
! 15 Break/Reset
! 86 Stop
! 89 F1
!
! I prefer using "keycode" over "keysym" so I can rerun the file to
! fix up my keyboard.
!
! This sets the backspace key to generate Delete, removes all caps lock
! bindings, assigns a control key to what used to be the caps lock key,
! makes the F1 generate Esc, and makes the Break/Reset key be a shift lock.
keycode 101 = Delete
keycode 55 = Control_R
clear Lock
add Control = Control_R
keycode 89 = Escape
keycode 15 = Caps_Lock
add Lock = Caps_Lock
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10. Display Properties for X-XPROP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The XPROP utility displays the window and font properties for an X window in an
X window system server. You can identify the window with command operands, or
you can click on the target window. The command then displays a list of
properties.
To run XPROP, issue the xprop command:
Note: You can enter the xprop operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéXPROP Functions Operands Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéTarget Window -frame Γöé
Γöé -id Γöé
Γöé -name Γöé
Γöé -root Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéProperty -font Γöé
Γöé -len Γöé
Γöé -notype Γöé
Γöé -remove Γöé
Γöé -spy Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional Functions -display Γöé
Γöé -f Γöé
Γöé -fs Γöé
Γöé -grammar Γöé
Γöé -help Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10.1. Target Window Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxpropΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -frameΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -id idΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -name nameΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -rootΓöÇΓöÿ
-frame
Specifies that when windows are selected by hand (that is, you do not
specify the -name, -root, or -id operands), the xprop command will look at
the window manager frame (if there is one) instead of the X client window.
PM frames on X Windows cannot be selected with this option.
-id id
Specifies a window ID. You can use this operand to select a window rather
than using the pointer to select a window.
-name name
Specifies the name of the target window. You can use this instead of using
the pointer to select a window.
-root
Specifies that the target window is the X root window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10.2. Property Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxpropΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -font fontΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -len nΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -notypeΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -remove property_nameΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -spyΓöÇΓöÿ
-font font
Specifies that the properties of the named font are displayed.
-len n
Specifies that no more than n bytes of any property should be read or
displayed. expressions, to the standard output file.
-notype
Specifies that xprop should not display the property type.
-remove property name
Specifies that the named property is to be removed from the target window.
-spy
Specifies that xprop should continually monitor window properties for
property changes.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10.3. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxpropΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ -displayΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ:serverΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇhostΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇscreenΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -f name formatΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇdformatΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -fs fileΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -grammarΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -helpΓöÇΓöÿ
-display host:server.screen
Allows you to specify the display, server, and screen to connect to. host is
the host name of the physical display, server specifies the server number,
and screen specifies the screen number. For example:
xprop -display your_node:0.1
This specifies screen 1 of server 0 on the display named by your_node.
Either or both the host name and screen can be omitted. If the host name is
omitted, the local display is assumed. If the screen is omitted, screen 0 is
assumed, and the period is not needed.
-f name format dformat
Indicates that the format for name is specified in the format operand, and
that the dformat is specified in the dformat operand. If you do not enter a
value for dformat, the value "=$0+\n" is used.
-fs file
Specifies that the file named in the file operand should be used as a source
for more formats for properties.
-grammar
Prints out the detailed grammar (syntax) listing of all options for this
command.
-help
Prints a summary of the operand meanings.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10.4. Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
o To display the properties of the window numbered "0x20007":
xprop -id 0x20007
o To display the name of the root window:
xprop -root WM_NAME
o To display the window manager hints for the clock:
xprop -name xclock WM_HINTS
o To display the start of the cut buffer:
xprop -root -len 100 CUT_BUFFER0
o To display the point size of the fixed font:
xprop -font fixed POINT_SIZE
o To display all the properties of window # 0x200007:
xprop -id 0x200007
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10.5. How xprop Works ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This section provides supplementary information for using the xprop utility,
and its -f name format dformat operand.
For each of the properties, its value on the selected window or font is printed
using the supplied formatting information. If no formatting information is
supplied, internal defaults are used. If a property is not defined on the
selected window or font, "not defined" is printed as the value for that
property. If no property list is given, all the properties possessed by the
selected window or font are printed.
A window may be selected in one of four ways. First, if the desired window is
the root window, the -root argument may be used. If the desired window is not
the root window, it may be selected in two ways on the command line, either by
ID number, which can obtained from xwininfo, or by name if the window possesses
a name. The -id argument selects a window by ID number specified in either
decimal or hex (hex must start with 0x). The -name argument selects a window
by name.
The last way to select a window does not involve the command line at all. If
none of -font, -id, -name, and -root are specified, a crosshairs cursor is
displayed and the user is allowed to choose any visible window by pressing any
pointer button in the desired window. If it is desired to display properties of
a font as opposed to a window, the -font argument must be used.
Other than the above four arguments and the -help argument for obtaining help,
and the -grammar argument for listing the full grammar for the command line,
all the other command line arguments are used in specifying both the format of
the properties to be displayed and how to display them. The -len n argument
specifies that at most n bytes of any given property will be read and
displayed. This is useful for example when displaying the cut buffer on the
root window which could run to several pages if displayed in full.
Normally, each property name is displayed by printing first the property name
then its type (if it has one) in parentheses followed by its value. The
-notype argument specifies that property types should not be displayed. The
-fs argument is used to specify a file containing a list of formats for
properties while the -f argument is used to specify the format for one
property.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10.5.1. Using format and dformat Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The formatting information for a property actually consists of two parts: a
format and a dformat. The format operand specifies the actual format of the
property (for example,is it made up of words, bytes, or longs?). The dformat
operand specifies how the property should be displayed.
The following paragraphs describe how to construct formats and dformats.
However, for the vast majority of users and uses, this should not be necessary
as the built-in defaults contain the formats and dformats necessary to display
all the standard properties. It should only be necessary to specify formats and
dformats if a new property is being dealt with or the user dislikes the
standard display format. New users especially are encouraged to skip this
part.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10.5.1.1. The format Operand ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A format consists of one of the characters 0, 8, 16, or 32 followed by one or
more format characters. The 0, 8, 16, or 32, specifies how many bits per field
there are in the property.
0 Is a special case meaning use the field size information associated
with the property itself. (This is only needed for special cases
like type INTEGER which is actually three different types depending
on the size of the fields of the property.)
8 Means that the property is a sequence of bytes.
16 Means the property is a sequence of words. The difference between
the 8 and the 16 lies in the fact that the sequence of words will be
byte swapped while the sequence of bytes will not be when read by a
machine of the opposite byte order of the machine that originally
wrote the property.
For more information on how properties are formatted and stored, consult a
publication that describes the Xlib library.
Once the size of the fields has been specified, it is necessary to specify the
type of each field (for example, is it an integer, a string, or an atom). This
is done using one format character per field. If there are more fields in the
property than format characters supplied, the last character will be repeated
as many times as necessary for the extra fields. The format characters and
their meaning are as follows:
a The field holds an atom number. A field of this type should be of
size 32.
b The field is in Boolean. A 0 means false while anything else means
true.
c The field is an unsigned number, a cardinal.
i The field is a signed integer.
m The field is a set of bit flags, 1 meaning on.
s This field and the next ones until either a 0 or the end of the
property represent a sequence of bytes. This format character is
only usable with a field size of 8 and is most often used to
represent a string.
x The field is a hex number. This works like the "c" format character,
but is displayed in hex. It is most useful for displaying window
IDs.)
An example format is 32ica which is the format for a property of three fields
of 32 bits each, the first holding a signed integer, the second an unsigned
integer, and the third an atom.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10.5.1.2. The dformat Operand ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The format of a dformat unlike that of a format is not so rigid. The only
limitations on a dformat is that one may not start with a letter or a dash.
This is so that it can be distinguished from a property name or an argument. A
dformat is a text string containing special characters instructing that various
fields be printed at various points in a manner similar to the formatting
string used by printf. For example, the dformat is ( $0, $1 \)\n would render
the POINT 3, -4, which has a format of 32ii as is ( 3, -4 )\n.
Any character other than a $, ?, \, or a ( in a dformat prints as itself. To
print a $, ?, \, or ( character, precede it with a backslash character(\). For
example, to print out a $, use \$. Several special backslash sequences are
provided as shortcuts.
\n Causes a new line to be displayed,
\t Causes a tab to be displayed.
\ octal Where octal is an octal number, displays character number octal.
A $ followed by a number n causes field number n to be displayed. The format
of the displayed field depends on the formatting character used to describe it
in the corresponding format. For example, if a cardinal number is described by
"c" it will print in decimal. If it is described by an "x" it is displayed in
hex.
If the field is not present in the property (this is possible with some
properties), <field not available> is displayed instead. The sequence $n+ will
display field number n, a comma, field number n+1, then another comma, then ...
until the last field defined. If field n is not defined, nothing is displayed.
This is useful for a property that is a list of values.
A ? is used to start a conditional expression, a kind of if-then statement.
?exp(text) will display text if and only if exp evaluates to non-zero. This is
useful for two things. First, it allows fields to be displayed if and only if
a flag is set. And second, it allows a value such as a state number to be
displayed as a name rather than as just a number. The syntax of exp is as
follows:
exp ::= term | term=exp | !exp
term ::= n | $n | mn
The ! operator is a logical "not", changing 0 to 1 and any non-zero value to 0.
= is an equality operator. Note that internally all expressions are evaluated
as 32 bit numbers, so -1 is not equal to 65535. = returns 1 if the two values
are equal and 0 if not. The n represents the constant value n, while $n
represents the value of field number n. The mn is 1 if flag number n in the
first field having format character "m" in the corresponding format is 1, 0
otherwise.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10.5.1.3. Examples ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
?m3(count: $3\n) displays field 3 with a label of count if and only if flag
number 3 (count starts at 0!) is on.
?$2=0(True)?!$2=0(False) Displays the inverted value of field 2 as a Boolean.
In order to display a property, xprop needs both a format and a dformat
operand. Before xprop uses its default values of a format of 32x and a dformat
of = { $0+ }\n, it searches several places in an attempt to find more specific
formats. First, a search is made using the name of the property. If this
fails, a search is made using the type of the property. This allows type
STRING to be defined with one set of formats while allowing property WM_NAME
which is of type STRING to be defined with a different format. In this way,
the display formats for a given type can be overridden for specific properties.
The locations searched are in order:
1. The format, if any, specified with the property name (as in 8x WM_NAME)
2. The formats defined by -f options in last to first order
3. The contents of the file specified by the -fs option if any
4. The contents of the file specified by the environment variable XPROPFORMATS
if any
5. xprop's built in file of formats.
The format of the files referred to by the -fs argument and the XPROPFORMATS
variable is one or more lines of the following form:
name format [dformat]
name Is either the name of a property or the name of a type;
format Is the format to be used with name
dformat is the dformat to be used with name. If dformat is not present, " =
$0+\\n" is assumed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10.6. Environment Variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Set these environment variables.
DISPLAY To get the default display.
XPROPFORMATS To specify the name of a file from which additional formats
are to be obtained.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.11. Display Protocol Information-XSCOPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The XSCOPE utility displays the X Window System protocol activity between an X
Window System client application and PMX.
To run XSCOPE, issue the xscope command:
Note: You can enter the xscope operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇ -hcurrent_hostΓöÇΓöÉ ΓöîΓöÇ -i1ΓöÇΓöÉ ΓöîΓöÇ -o0ΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxscopeΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -hserver_hostΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -inΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -onΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöîΓöÇ -d0ΓöÇΓöÉ ΓöîΓöÇ -v1ΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -dnΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -vnΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -qΓöÇΓöÿ
Displaying xscope Help
ΓöÇΓöÇxscopeΓöÇΓöÇ -?ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
-h server-host Specifies the host name or internet address where the X Window
System server is running. If you specify server-host, do not put a
space between the -h and the server-host. If you do not specify the
-h parameter, the server-host defaults to the host from which you
entered the xscope command.
-i n Specifies the input port.
-o n Specifies the output port.
-d n Sets the server display number.
-v n Controls the amount of detail in the output. When you print the
contents of the X11 packet fields, some fields are of obvious value,
and others are of lesser value. To control the amount of output,
XSCOPE generates output according to the level of verbosity selected
by the user. Levels 2 and 3 can produce a large amount of data.
The following list shows the control levels:
0 Prints protocol headers only (time, request or reply, and names).
1 Prints useful content fields.
2 Prints almost everything.
3 Formats and prints every bit and byte. If you specify a verbosity level
greater than 3, XSCOPE also prints the hexadecimal buffer.
-q This option provides relatively quiet output. It is equivalent to
-v0.
-? Displays a list of the parameters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.11.1. Subcommands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The following subcommands can be used in the XSCOPE command shell:
quit Subcommand
The quit subcommand ends the XSCOPE session and exits the XSCOPE command
shell. You can issue the quit subcommand with the abbreviation qui.
ΓöÇΓöÇquitΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
verbose Subcommand
Once you have started XSCOPE, you can use the verbose subcommand to control
the amount of detail in the output generated. The verbose subcommand works
like the -v parameter on the xscope command.
ΓöÇΓöÇverboseΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.11.2. XSCOPE Connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
XSCOPE monitors the connections between PMX and an X Window System client
application. XSCOPE runs as a separate process. Adjusting the host and
display number to which the X Window System client application attaches can
result in the client's attaching to XSCOPE instead of to X Window System as if
XSCOPE were PMX. XSCOPE attaches to PMX as if it were the X Window System
client application.
All bytes from the client are sent to XSCOPE, which passes them on to PMX. All
bytes from PMX are sent to XSCOPE, which then sends them on to the client.
XSCOPE is transparent to the client and PMX.
In addition to passing characters back and forth, XSCOPE prints information
about this traffic on the standard output file or device, giving performance
and debugging information for an X Window System client application and PMX.
XSCOPE also reads commands from the standard input. Typing -vn commands into
the XSCOPE environment where it started can change the level of detail in the
output while running.
Running XSCOPE involves three processes on different workstations. We
recommended that you:
1. Start PMX
2. Start XSCOPE
3. Start the X client
The processes follow:
Process Description
PMX PMX is running on host A and using display B; for example, the
host bagel and the display 0.
XSCOPE XSCOPE must be told where PMX is (what workstation and what
display). The display number is generally not used. The
options for XSCOPE are -hserver_host and -ddisplay_number. In
the example, these are -hbagel -d0. XSCOPE does not try to
connect to PMX until the X Window System client application
connects to XSCOPE.
X Client The client connects to XSCOPE rather than to PMX. To avoid
changing the code for the client, XSCOPE listens on the same
port as PMX. This works well if PMX and XSCOPE are on different
workstations.
If PMX and XSCOPE are on the same workstation, listening on the
same port creates a port conflict. To resolve this conflict,
XSCOPE can be given a different input or output port number, as
necessary, to avoid the port to which PMX is listening. The
client must connect to this offset port number. The input port
for XSCOPE is set by -iin_port, and the output port is set by
-oout_port. The default input port is 1, and the default output
port is 0.
These ports are offset by PMX base (6000) and the display
number. The client attaches to XSCOPE by changing its usual
display number by the port offset.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.11.2.1. Example 1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With PMX running on bagel, display 0 (the default) and with XSCOPE and the
client running on cleo, start XSCOPE with the following command:
xscope -hbagel -i0
The client connects to what appears to be PMX on cleo:0 and is actually
attached to XSCOPE. XSCOPE is attached to PMX on bagel:0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.11.2.2. Example 2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If all three processes are running on cleo, start XSCOPE by issuing the
following statement:
xscope -i1
This causes XSCOPE to listen on port 6001 (display 1 for PMX). The client
attaches to XSCOPE on cleo:1 and XSCOPE connects through to PMX on cleo:0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.11.2.3. Example 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Another example is running PMX and XSCOPE on the same workstation while running
a client on a different workstation:
xscope -h129.42.3.120 -i1 -v2 > xscope.out
On a different workstation, run the client:
export DISPLAY=129.42.3.120:1
---- start client ----
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.11.2.4. Example 4 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This example runs XSCOPE, PMX, and the client on different workstations. Start
PMX as normal on workstation 129.42.3.63. On a different workstation,
129.42.3.120, issue the following statement:
xscope -h129.42.3.63 -v2 > trace.out
Then, on a different workstation, run the client:
export DISPLAY=129.42.3.120:0
---- start client ----
To ensure that XSCOPE operates properly, start PMX before starting XSCOPE.
XSCOPE may not function properly otherwise. Though XSCOPE runs well, one
limitation is that, for the OS/2 version, no provision is included for
extensions to the base protocol.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12. Setting User Defaults-XSET ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the XSET utility to dynamically change the behavior of PMX. Some X servers
might not respond to all of the requests that XSET can make.
To run XSET, issue the xset command:
Note: You can enter the xset operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéXSET Functions Operands Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBell b on Γöé
Γöé b off Γöé
Γöé -b Γöé
Γöé b Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBug Compatibility -bc Γöé
Γöé bc Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéFont Path fp Γöé
Γöé -fp Γöé
Γöé +fp Γöé
Γöé fp defualt Γöé
Γöé fp rehash Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéKey Click c on Γöé
Γöé c off Γöé
Γöé -c Γöé
Γöé c Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéLight Emitting Diodes led on Γöé
Γöé(LED) led off Γöé
Γöé -led 1-32 Γöé
Γöé led 1-32 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMouse m Γöé
Γöé m default Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRepeat r on Γöé
Γöé r off Γöé
Γöé -r Γöé
Γöé r Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéScreen Saver s Γöé
Γöé s blank Γöé
Γöé s default Γöé
Γöé s expose Γöé
Γöé s noblank Γöé
Γöé s noexpose Γöé
Γöé s off Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional Functions p Γöé
Γöé -display Γöé
Γöé q Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
Note: Font directory designations are case-sensitive, and if you delete them,
you must type them exactly as they were given to PMX. PMX ignores
directories that do not contain font databases created by mkfontdr.
Use the q (query) parameter to determine the current font path.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12.1. Bell Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxsetΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇb onΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γö£ΓöÇb offΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇ -bΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇbΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇvolΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇpitchΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇdurΓöÇΓöÿ
b on
Enables the bell.
b off
Disables the bell.
-b
Disables the bell.
b vol pitch dur
Allows you to set the pitch, loudness, and duration of the bell. The volume
is expressed in terms of a percentage of its maximum. The pitch is expressed
in hertz, and the duration is expressed in milliseconds. (PMX supports only
pitch and duration. Any volume greater than 0 is treated as if it were 100.)
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12.2. Bug Compatibility Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxsetΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇ -bcΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇbcΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-bc
Controls bug compatibility mode in the server. bc with a preceding hyphen
(-) disables bug compatibility.
bc
bc enables bug compatibility.
Note: This mode should be used with caution. The server must support the
MIT-SUNDRY-NONSTANDARD protocol extension in order for this option to
work. New application development should be done with this mode
disabled.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12.3. Font Path Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxsetΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé Γöé ΓöîΓöÇ,ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ Γöé Γöé
Γöé Γöé Γöé Γöé Γöé
Γöé ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ fpΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇpathΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
Γöé Γö£ΓöÇ fp=ΓöÇΓöñ Γöé
Γöé Γö£ΓöÇ -fpΓöÇΓöñ Γöé
Γöé Γö£ΓöÇ fpΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ Γöé
Γöé Γö£ΓöÇ +fpΓöÇΓöñ Γöé
Γöé ΓööΓöÇ fp+ΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇfp defaultΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇfp rehashΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
fp path, fp= path
Sets the font path used by the server. path must be a directory or a list
of directories separated by a comma. The directories are interpreted by the
server, not the client, and are server-dependent. Directories that do not
contain font databases created by MKFONTDIR will be ignored by the server.
-fp path, fp- path
Causes the server to remove directories from the current font path To remove
a font path directory list, include a comma to separate the paths. -fp
removes the directories from the beginning of the font path. fp- removes
the directories from the end of the font path.
+fp path, fp+ path
Causes the server to add directories from the current font path. To add a
font path directory list, include a comma to separate the paths. +fp adds
the directories to the beginning of the font path. fp+ adds the directories
to the end of the font path.
fp default
Restores the default font path.
fp rehash
Causes the server to reread the font databases.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12.4. Key Click Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxsetΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇc onΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ ΓööΓöÇcΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ
Γö£ΓöÇc offΓöÇΓöñ ΓööΓöÇvolΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇ -cΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
c on
Enables the key click.
c off
Disables the key click.
-c
Disables the key click.
c vol
Enables the key click, if vol is greater than 0 or is not specified;
disables the key click if vol is 0. The vol is the volume expressed as a
percentage
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12.5. Light Emitting Diode (LED) Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxsetΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇledΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ΓööΓöÇ - ΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ1-32ΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇled onΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇled offΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
led on
Allows you to turn on all LEDs on the keyboard.
led off
Allows you to turn off all LEDs on the keyboard.
-led 1-32
Turns off a specified LED on the keyboard. If no number is given, all LEDs
are turned off.
led 1-32
Turns on a specified light-emitting diode (LED) on the keyboard. If no
number is given, all LEDs are turned on. The association between a number
and a specific LED is server-dependent.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12.6. Mouse Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxsetΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇmΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ΓööΓöÇaccΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
Γöé ΓööΓöÇthrΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
ΓööΓöÇm defaultΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
m acc thr
Allows you to set mouse acceleration and threshold. The pointer goes acc
times as fast when it travels more than thr pixels in a short time. This
way, the mouse can be used for precise alignment of the pointer when it is
moved slowly, but the pointer travels quickly across the screen when the
mouse moves quickly.
m default
Resets the mouse acceleration and threshold to the default values.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12.7. Repeat Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxsetΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇr onΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γö£ΓöÇr offΓöÇΓöñ
Γö£ΓöÇrΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇ -rΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
r on
Enables the automatic keyboard repeat function.
r off
Disables the automatic keyboard repeat function.
-r
Disables the automatic keyboard repeat function.
r
Enables the automatic keyboard repeat function.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12.8. Screen Saver Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxsetΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
Γö£ΓöÇsΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé ΓööΓöÇlengthΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
Γöé ΓööΓöÇperiodΓöÇΓöÿ Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇs defaultΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γö£ΓöÇs offΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γö£ΓöÇs blankΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γö£ΓöÇs noblankΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γö£ΓöÇs exposeΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓööΓöÇs noexposeΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
s length period
Controls the length, in seconds, that the server must be inactive before
screen saving is activated. The period parameter (in seconds) determines how
often the background is changed during screen saver activity. If no length
or period is specified, the screen saver default function is restored.
s blank
Specifies that, when screen-saver activity occurs, the screen is cleared.
s default
Restores the default screen-saver activity.
s expose
Specifies that window exposures sent by the server to clients regenerate the
screen contents when the server stops the screen-saver activity.
s noblank
Allows you to specify that when screen saver activity occurs, a background
pattern is used rather than clearing the screen.
s noexpose
Disables the screen-saver function unless the server can regenerate the
screens without causing exposure events to be sent to client windows.
s off
Disables the screen-saver function.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12.9. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxsetΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇp pixel_value color_nameΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -display ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ:serverΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇhostΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ.screenΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇqΓöÇΓöÿ
display host:server.screen
Specifies the display, server, and screen to connect to. host is the host
name of the physical display, server specifies the server number, and screen
specifies the screen number. For example:
-display your_node:0.1
This specifies screen 1 of server 0 on the display named by your_node.
Either, or both, the host name and screen can be omitted. If the host name
is omitted, the local display is assumed. If the screen is omitted, screen 0
is assumed, and the period is not needed.
p pixel_value color_name
Sets the pixel colors. The pixel_value is a color map entry number in
decimal. color_name is a color specification.
You can change the root background colors on some servers by changing the
entries for BlackPixel and WhitePixel. Although these are often 0 and 1,
they need not be. Also, a server can allocate those colors privately, in
which case an error is generated. The map entry must not be a read-only
color, or an error results. (The PMX server currently supports only
StaticColor or StaticGray visuals, so the color table has only read-only
entries.)
q
Queries the server for the current settings of the values that XSET allows
you to change
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.13. Define Colormap properties-XSTDCMAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The XSTDCMAP utility lets you selectively define the colormap properties for X
client applications.
To run XSTDCMAP, issue the xstdcmap command.
Note: You can enter the xstdcmap operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéXSTDCMAP Functions Operands Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéColor Map -all Γöé
Γöé -best Γöé
Γöé -blue Γöé
Γöé -default Γöé
Γöé -green Γöé
Γöé -gray Γöé
Γöé -red Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional Functions -delete Γöé
Γöé -display Γöé
Γöé -help Γöé
Γöé -verbose Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.13.1. Color Map Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxstdcmapΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -allΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -bestΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -blueΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -defaultΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -greenΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -greyΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -redΓöÇΓöÿ
-all
Specifies that you want to define all six standard colormap properties on
each screen of the display. Because not all screens will support visuals
where all six standard colormap properties have meaning, the xstdcmap
utility determines the allocations and visuals for the colormap properties
of a screen. The properties you define will replace any already defined.
-best
Specifies that the RGB_BEST_MAP should be defined.
-blue
Specifies that the RGB_BLUE_MAP should be defined.
-default
Specifies that the RGB_DEFAULT_MAP should be defined.
-green
Specifies that the RGB_GREEN_MAP should be defined.
-grey
Specifies that the RGB_GRAY_MAP should be defined.
-red
Specifies that the RGB_RED_MAP should be defined.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.13.2. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxstdcmapΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -delete mapΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -display ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ:serverΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇhostΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ.screenΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -helpΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇΓöÇ -verboseΓöÇΓöÿ
-delete map
Specifies a colormap to delete. The map can be one of:
o best
o blue
o default
o red
o green
o gray
-display host:server.screen
Allows you to specify the display, server, and screen to connect to. host is
the host name of the physical display, server specifies the server number,
and screen specifies the screen number. For example:
xstdcmap -display your_node:0.1
This specifies screen 1 of server 0 on the display named by your_node.
Either or both the host name and screen can be omitted. If the host name is
omitted, the local display is assumed. If the screen is omitted, screen 0 is
assumed, and the period is not needed.
-help
Displays brief descriptions of the command operands.
-verbose
Specifies that the xstdcmap utility will print logging information as it
parses the input and defines colormap properties.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.14. Display Window Information-XWININFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The XWININFO utility displays information about X Window System client
application windows. The information that displays depends on the options you
choose.
You can select the target window in several ways. You can use the -id
parameter, -name parameter, and -root parameter on the xwininfo command, or you
can click the mouse (by clicking any mouse button in the window) or by
specifying its window ID on the command line with the
To run XWININFO, issue the xwininfo command:
Note: You can enter the xwininfo operands in any order.
ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéXWININFO Functions Operands Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDimension -english Γöé
Γöé -metric Γöé
Γöé -size Γöé
Γöé -shape Γöé
Γöé -stats Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéTarget Window -events Γöé
Γöé -id Γöé
Γöé -int Γöé
Γöé -name Γöé
Γöé -root Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRelatives -children Γöé
Γöé -tree Γöé
Γöé -tree Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditional Functions -all Γöé
Γöé -bits Γöé
Γöé -display Γöé
Γöé -frame Γöé
Γöé -help Γöé
Γöé -wm Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
Note: If you use both the -stats and -bits parameters, XWININFO displays some
redundant information. Also, the information displayed by these
parameters may not be correct if XWININFO makes incorrect assumptions
about the window's border width, the behavior of the application, or
the window manager.
Following is an example of the output of the XWININFO utility:
xwininfo ==> Please select the window about which you
==> would like information by clicking the
==> mouse in the window.
xwininfo ==> Window id: 0x60000f (xterm)
==> Upper left X: 4
==> Upper left Y: 19
==> Width: 726
==> Height: 966
==> Depth: 4
==> Border width: 3
==> Window class: InputOutput
==> Colormap: 0x80065
==> Window Bit Gravity State: NorthWestGravity
==> Window Window Gravity State: NorthWestGravity
==> Window Backing Store State: NotUseful
==> Window Save Under State: no
==> Window Map State: IsViewable
==> Window Override Redirect State: no
==> Corners: +4+19-336640+19-33640-333+4-33
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.14.1. Dimension Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxwininfoΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -englishΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -metricΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -sizeΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -shapeΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -statsΓöÇΓöÿ
-english
Causes all individual height, width, and x and y positions to be displayed
in inches (feet, yards, and miles if necessary) as well as number of pixels.
-metric and -english can both be enabled at the same time.
-metric
Causes all individual height, width, and x and y positions to be displayed
in millimeters as well as number of pixels, based on what the server
determines the resolution to be. Geometry specifications in +x+y form are
not changed.
-size
Displays the selected window's sizing hints. Displayed information includes
details about the sizing of your windows.
-shape
Causes the selected window's window and border shape extents to be
displayed.
-stats
Displays location and appearance attributes of the selected window. This
includes the window's location, width, height, depth, border width, class,
and map state. This is the default if no parameters are specified.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.14.2. Target Window Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxwininfoΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -eventsΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -id idΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -intΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -name nameΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -rootΓöÇΓöÿ
-events
Displays the selected window's event masks. Both the event mask of events
wanted by some client and the event mask of events not to propagate are
displayed.
-id id
Specifies the ID of a target window. This is useful in debugging X
applications where the target window is not mapped to the screen or where
the use of the mouse might be impossible or interfere with the application.
-int
Specifies that all X Window System server window IDs are displayed as
integer values. The default is to display them as hexadecimal values.
-name name
Specifies the name of the target window.
-root
Specifies that the X Window System server root window is the target window.
This is useful in situations where the root window is obscured.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.14.3. Relative Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxwininfoΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -childrenΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -treeΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -treeΓöÇΓöÿ
-children
Displays the selected window's root, parent, and children windows' IDs and
names.
-tree
Displays the root, parent, and child window IDs and the name of the selected
window.
-tree
Specifies a display similar to the -children option but displays all
children recursively.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.14.4. Additional Operands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓöÇΓöÇxwininfoΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -allΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -bitsΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -display ΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇ:serverΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓööΓöÇhostΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ.screenΓöÇΓöÿ
ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇ
ΓööΓöÇ -frameΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -helpΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇ -wmΓöÇΓöÿ
-all
Provides all available information.
-bits
Displays information about the window and bit gravities, the window's
backing store hint and backing_planes value, its backing pixel, and whether
or not the window has save-under set.
-display host:server.screen
Specifies the display, server, and screen to connect to. host is the host
name of the physical display, server specifies the server number, and screen
specifies the screen number. For example:
-display your_node:0.1
This specifies screen 1 of server 0 on the display named by your_node.
Either, or both, the host name and screen can be omitted. If the host name
is omitted, the local display is assumed. If the screen is omitted, screen 0
is assumed, and the period is not needed.
-frame
Causes window manager frames to be recognized when manually selecting
windows. (PMX does not support this option.)
-help
Prints a summary of the xwininfo command.
-wm
Displays the selected window's window manager hints. This includes whether
the application accepts input, what the window's icon window number and name
are, where the window's icon should go, and what the window's initial state
should be.